Nissan 2010 Frontier Owners Manual | Owner's

2015-09-07

: Nissan Nissan-2010-Frontier-Owners-Manual-762759 nissan-2010-frontier-owners-manual-762759 nissan pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 373 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2010 Frontier Owner's Manual
OM0E-0D40U0
Table of Contents

2010 FRONTIER

OWNER'S MANUAL

2010 NISSAN FRONTIER D40-D

Printing : July 2009 (11)

Publication No.: OM0E-0D40U0

Printed in U.S.A.

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

D40-D

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide” explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have any

questions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive

models, a mark is placed at the begin-

ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. Be sure to read

“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-

road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-

ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving

safety precautions”, in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability, and

may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from modi-

fications may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design without notice and with-

out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTHtis a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Visteon.

XM Radiotrequires

subscription, sold

separately after first 90

days. Not available in

Alaska, Hawaii or

Guam. For more

information, visit

www.xmradio.com.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations ................0-8

Warning/indicator lights ...........................0-10

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-16)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-57)

3. Front seat belts (P. 1-16)

4. Head restraints (P.1-6)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-65)

6. Seats (P. 1-2)

7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P. 1-65)

8. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-70)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-57)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-28)

11. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-30)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0135

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 8-6)

2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-25)

3. Windshield (P. 8-22)

4. Windows (P. 2-45)

5. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped),

keys (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-13)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)

8. Flat tire (P. 6-3)

9. Tire chains (P. 8-39)

10. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-26); Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

11. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0052

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear sliding window (if so equipped)

(P.2-48)

2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)

3. Truck box, tailgate (P. 3-15)

4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

5. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-10, P. 9-4)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0053

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-50)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-12)

3. Rearview mirror (if so equipped)

(P. 3-13)

4. Vents (P. 4-2)

5. Glove box (P. 2-40)

6. Shift selector (automatic transmission, if

so equipped) (P. 5-13)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-42)

8. Front seats (P. 1-2)

9. Console box (P. 2-39)

10. Rear seats (P. 1-15)

11. Flat tire/Jacking equipment storage

(P. 6-3)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0054

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-2)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-26)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System (if so equipped)

(P. 4-35, P. 4-37)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-57, P. 2-31)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-36)

9. Audio system controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-17)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)

12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-66)

13. Auxiliary audio input jack

(if so equipped) (P. 4-34)

14. Power outlet (P. 2-35)

LIC1422

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch

(if so equipped) (P.2-34)

Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)

16. Shift selector (P. 5-13,5-17 )

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-22)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P.4-10)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)

20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)

21. Tilt steering wheel control

(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)

22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-31)

23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)

24. Outside mirror controls (if so equipped)

(P. 3-15)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

QR25DE engine

1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24)

3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24)

4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

7. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14)

8. Drive belt location (P.8-18)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WDI0643

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ40DE engine

1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24)

3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24)

4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)

8. Drive belt location (P.8-18)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0167

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-14

Automatic transmis-

sion oil temperature

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Automatic transmis-

sion park warning

light (

model)

2-14

Brake warning light 2-15

Charge warning

light

2-15

Door open warning

light

2-15

Warning

light

Name Page

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-15

4WD warning light

(model)

2-16

Low fuel warning

light

2-16

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-16

Low windshield

washer fluid warning

light

2-18

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-18

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-18

Indicator

light

Name Page

Automatic transmis-

sion position indica-

tor light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Cruise main switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Cruise set switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-19

Electronic locking

rear differential (E-

Lock) system on

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-19

4WD shift indicator

light (

model)

2-19

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-19

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator

light

Name Page

High beam indicator

light (Blue)

2-19

Hill descent control

system on indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-33

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL)

2-20

Overdrive off indica-

tor light (A/T models

only)

2-20

Security indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light

for models with

ABLS (if so

equipped)

2-21

Slip indicator light

for models with

VDC (if so

equipped)

2-21

Indicator

light

Name Page

Transfer 4LO posi-

tion indicator light

(model)

2-21

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-21

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-22

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-2

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-4

Jump seat (King cab) ...........................1-5

Armrest .......................................1-6

Head restraints.................................1-6

Adjustable headrest (Crew cab models only)

(if so equipped) ................................1-9

Flexible seating................................1-12

Seat belts .......................................1-16

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-16

Pregnant women ..............................1-19

Injured persons................................1-19

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-19

Seat belt extenders ............................1-23

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-24

Child safety......................................1-24

Infants........................................1-25

Small children.................................1-25

Larger children ................................1-25

Child restraints...................................1-26

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-26

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System .............................1-28

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH (Crew cab models only).................1-31

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts — (Crew cab models only).........1-33

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts — passenger’s side jump seat

(King cab models only).........................1-36

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH (Crew cab model only) ............1-40

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts — front passenger and

rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) .........1-42

Foward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts — front passenger and

passenger’s side jump seat

(King cab models only).........................1-45

Installing top tether strap (Front passenger

seat – King cab models only) ...................1-50

Installing top tether strap (Passenger’s side

jump seat – King cab models only) ..............1-51

Installing top tether strap (Rear bench seat –

Crew cab models only).........................1-52

Booster seats .................................1-52

Supplemental restraint system .....................1-57

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................1-57

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-71

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-72

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” later in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined

to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully

applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of

the seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-

clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-

hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P

(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking

brake fully applied.

WRS0163

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat

cushion.

Lumbar support (if so equipped for

driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver. Move the lever forward or

backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

JUMP SEAT (King cab)

WARNING

●Do not use a child restraint in the driv-

er’s side jump seat. This seating posi-

tion is not suitable for child restraint

installation. A child restraint can be in-

stalled in the passenger’s side jump

seat when the seat extension is un-

folded from the seat base.

●When folding the jump seat, be careful

not to squeeze your finger between the

seat cushion and the body side.

WRS0164 WRS0389 LRS0556

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

ARMREST

To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench

seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and

fold it down to the resting position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-

hicle safety systems. They may provide

additional protection against injury in cer-

tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head

restraints properly, as specified in this

section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the head restraint stalks or

remove the head restraint. Do not use the

seat if the head restraint has been re-

moved. If the head restraint was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head re-

straint before an occupant uses the seat-

ing position. Failure to follow these in-

structions can reduce the effectiveness of

the head restraints. This may increase the

risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints. All of the head

restraints are adjustable.

mIndicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

LRS0557 LRS0904

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down. Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the ad-

justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is

facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches s

1must be installed

in the hole with the lock button s

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from the

occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement

of the head restraint helps support the occu-

pant’s head by reducing its backward movement

and helping absorb some of the forces that may

lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as

described in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (Crew cab

models only) (if so equipped)

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust

the headrests properly, as specified in this

section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the adjustable headrest stalks

or remove the adjustable headrests. Do

not use the seat if the adjustable head-

rests have been removed. If the headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly adjust

the headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position. Failure to follow these

instructions can reduce the effectiveness

of the adjustable headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death in

a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the

headrests are adjustable.

nIndicates the seating position is equipped with

an adjustable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

SPA1025 LRS0905

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the

center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down. Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the ad-

justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose

in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest be-

fore an occupant uses the seating position.

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing

the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-

justment notches s

1must be installed in the

hole with the lock button s

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-

cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

●Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide significant

protection against injury in an accident.

Always replace and adjust them prop-

erly if they have been removed for any

reason.

●If the head restraints are removed for

any reason, they should be securely

stored to prevent them from causing

injury to passengers or damage to the

vehicle in case of sudden braking or an

accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatback

(if so equipped)

To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for

extra storage length when transporting long

items:

1Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift

up on the recline lever, located on the out-

side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback

forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the

latch located on the upper corner of the

seatback to release the back of the seat.

LRS0608

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2Once the seatback is released, it will enable

you to fold the front passenger seatback flat

over the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a

seating position, lift up on the seatback and

push it up to an upright position. Then pull up

on the recline lever and lean the seatback to

a proper seating position. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

●If you fold the front passenger’s seat-

back flat forward to carry longer ob-

jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-

cured and not near an air bag. In a

crash, an inflating air bag might force

that object toward a person. This could

cause severe injury or even death. Se-

cure objects away from the area in

which an air bag would inflate. See

“Precautions on supplemental restraint

system” later in this section.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the front passenger’s seat

when it is in the fold-down position. Use

of these areas by passengers could re-

sult in serious injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

Folding the rear bench seat

To fold the rear bench seat up:

1Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the

seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion

up.

LRS0609 LRS0398

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

2Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward

the back of the vehicle until it locks in place. s

3Repeat this process to raise and secure the

seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle

for maximum storage capacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi-

tion, reverse the process. Make sure to prop-

erly push the seat cushion down into place.

WARNING

●When the vehicle is being used to carry

cargo, properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do

not place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear

seat unless the seat bottom cushions

are in place and latched.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

LRS0566 LRS0567

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Folding the rear bench seat down

The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to

access the child restraint anchor point locations

or the jacking equipment.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up s

and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor

points s

2can be accessed behind the rear

bench seatback. The jacking equipment can be

accessed from behind the passenger’s side

seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

WRS0840

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be worn

at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-

vated, it cannot be reused and must be

replaced together with the retractor.

See your NISSAN dealer.

●Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be

done by a NISSAN dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any collision

by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts (Front seats

all models and rear seats Crew cab

models)

1Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shown

WRS0174

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the seat belt to

move, and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow

the driver and passengers some freedom of

movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during

certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child

restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-

straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

LRS0594 LRS0595

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passengers may

be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Fastening the seat belts (Jump seats

King cab models)

1. Open the jump seat. See “Seats” earlier in

this section. s

2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the seat belt to

move, and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

LRS0556 LRS0569

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

3Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The jump seat position’s three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow

the driver and passengers some freedom of

movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during

certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child

restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-

straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passengers may

be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-

tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

LRS0570 WRS0139

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s

1and

move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired

position s

2, so the belt passes over the center of

the shoulder. The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-

der belt anchor into position.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available which is

compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

LRS0242

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraint

●Forward-facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

CHILD SAFETY

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-

straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat

belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-

formation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat if

available (Crew Cab models). Studies show

that children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the front

seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over one year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions for minimum and maximum weight

and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat belts

which are provided. The seat belt may not fit

properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5

cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and

80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to

obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap

portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-

men. The booster seat should raise the child so

that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the top, middle portion of the shoulder

and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat

can only be used in seating positions that have a

three-point type seat belt. The booster seat

should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so

the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

area. The child could be seriously injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” later

in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand loads from child

restraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle (Crew cab model only) is equipped

with a universal child restraint anchor system,

referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-

straints include rigid or webbing-mounted at-

tachments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For details, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren) system” later in this

section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible

child restraints. This system may also be referred

to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.

With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle

seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard seating

positions only (Crew cab models only). Do not

attempt to install a child restraint in the center

position using the LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH lower anchors. The child

restraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

(Crew cab models only)

LRS0429

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS0748

LATCH label locations (Crew cab models

only)

LRS0571

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top

tether anchor” for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the top

tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo

so it does not contact the top tether strap.

Cargo that is not properly secured or

cargo that contacts the top tether strap

may damage it during a collision. A child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-

tions:

●On the back of the front passenger seat

(King cab only) as shown.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Front passenger seat (King cab models

only)

LRS0572

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Under the rear window behind the rear

bench seat (Crew cab only) as shown. ●On the floor between the jump seat belt

buckles in the center of the vehicle (King cab

only) as shown.

The anchor point s

3is located on the floor be-

tween the jump seat belt buckles in the center of

the vehicle. The routing bracket s

2is located

behind the cover plate s

1under the rear window

above the right passenger’s side jump seat.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew

cab models only)

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only)

LRS0393

Passenger’s side jump seat

(King cab models)

LRS0551

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is

not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing by

using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).

Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS — (Crew cab models only)

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the opera-

tion of the front passenger air bag. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1 WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0670

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS — PASSENGER’S SIDE

JUMP SEAT (King cab models only)

Rear-facing – step 6

WRS0763 LRS0597

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this

section.

●Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat with-

out unfolding the seat extender.

●A child restraint system will not be in-

stalled properly and the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Never install a child restraint system

on the driver’s side jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat

without unfolding the seat extender.

WARNING

●To install a rear-facing child restraint on

the passenger’s side jump seat, it will

be necessary to move the front passen-

ger’s seat fully forward and place the

front seatback upright or tilt it forward.

Failure to do so may cause the child

restraint to not be installed properly

and cause serious injury or death in a

sudden stop or collision.

– The front seat cannot be used when a

rear-facing child restraint is installed

on the jump seat. Attempting to do so

could cause serious injury in a sud-

den stop or collision.

LRS0549

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a child restraint on

the passenger’s side jump seat.

1. To access the jump seat extension s

1on the

passenger’s side jump seat only, pull up s

on the extension to unfold it to the open

position. Then unfold the two support legs

3and lower the jump seat to the full open

4seating position.

2Move the front passenger’s seat into the

FULL FORWARD position. Then move the

front seatback to the upright or tilted forward

position. Position the child restraint on the

jump seat. The direction of the child restraint

depends on the type of the child restraint

and the size of the child. Always follow the

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0559 LRS0537 Rear-facing (passenger’s side jump seat

only) — step 2

LRS0544

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

4Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear-facing — step 3

LRS0545

Rear-facing — step 4

LRS0546

Rear-facing — step 5

LRS0547

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the seat near the seat

belt path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH (Crew cab model only)

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 6

WRS0762

Rear-facing — step 7

WRS0918

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this

section. Do not install child restraints that

require the use of a top tether strap in seat-

ing positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest

to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest

when the child restraint is removed.

See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for

headrest adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable headrest and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-

ing position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2

WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is

not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 5.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT

PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH

SEAT (Crew cab models only)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the opera-

tion of the front passenger air bag. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats (Crew cab models only) or in the front

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

Forward-facing – step 5

WRS0697

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint or headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-

able headrest” in this section for head re-

straint or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper child restraint

fit, try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). See “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do

not install child restraints that require the use

of a top tether strap in seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again. You

may need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 7 WRS0698

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 7.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated see 9Front passenger

air bag and status light9in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

FOWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT

PASSENGER AND PASSENGER’S

SIDE JUMP SEAT (King cab models

only)

Forward-facing – step 11

WRS0475 LRS0598

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this

section.

●Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat with-

out unfolding the seat extender.

●A child restraint system will not be in-

stalled properly and the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Never install a child restraint system

on the driver’s side jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat

without unfolding the seat extender.

●To install a rear-facing child restraint on

the passenger’s side jump seat, it will

be necessary to move the front passen-

ger’s seat fully forward and place the

front seatback upright or tilt it forward.

Failure to do so may cause the child

restraint to not be installed properly

and cause serious injury or death in a

sudden stop or collision.

– The front seat cannot be used when a

rear-facing child restraint is installed

on the jump seat. Attempting to do so

could cause serious injury in a sud-

den stop or collision.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

passenger’s side jump seat (King cab models

only) or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

Foward-facing (front passenger seat) —

step 1

WRS0699

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. To access the jump seat extension s

1on the

passenger’s side jump seat pull up s

2on

the extension to unfold it to the open posi-

tion. Then unfold the two support legs s

and lower the jump seat to the full open s

seating position.

3. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seat back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint or headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-

LRS0559 LRS0537 Forward-facing (passenger’s side seating

position only) — step 3

WRS0919

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

able headrest” in this section for head re-

straint or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper child restraint

fit, try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

4. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this

section. Do not install child restraints that

require the use of a top tether strap to seat-

ing positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing — step 4

WRS0680

Forward-facing — step 5

LRS0667

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 7. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the seat near the seat

belt path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing — step 6

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 7

WRS0681 Forward-facing — step 8 WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

9. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

10. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

(Front passenger seat – King cab

models only)

Before securing the child restraint with the seat

belt,

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-

straint to position the top tether strap s

over the top of the seatback. If the head

restraint is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint

when the child restraint is removed. See

“Head restraint adjustment” in this

section for head restraint adjustment,

removal and installation information.

2. Route the top tether strap s

1between the

head restraint and the top of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point s

2on the seatback.

4. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

Front passenger seat (King cab models only)

LRS0572

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

(Passenger’s side jump seat – King

cab models only)

WARNING

Do not secure the top tether strap to the

routing bracket. If the child restraint is not

anchored properly, the risk of a child be-

ing injured or killed in a collision or a

sudden stop greatly increases.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top

tether strap routing bracket for the passen-

ger’s side jump seat.

2. Route the top tether strap through the rout-

ing bracket.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the tether

anchor point (3) located between the seat

belt buckles in the center of the vehicle.

4. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

Passenger’s side jump seat (King cab mod-

els only)

LRS0561

Anchor point access

LRS0392

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

(Rear bench seat – Crew cab models

only)

To access the anchor points s

2behind the rear

bench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward by

lifting up on the pull strap s

1behind the seat-

back.

Before securing the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating po-

sitions only [crew cab models only]) or the seat

belt, as applicable, follow these steps.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to

position the top tether strap s

1over the top

of the seatback. If the headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved. See “Adjustable headrest” in

this section for headrest adjustment,

removal and installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback and under the head restraint.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the seat directly behind the child

restraint.

4. Return the seatback to the locked position.

5. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

in a sudden stop or collision greatly

increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only)

LRS0576

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat s

2should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Booster seat installation on front

passenger seat and rear seat (Crew

cab models only)

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the

Automatic Locking Retractor mode when

using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”

sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint or headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint or head-

rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the booster seat is re-

moved. See “Head restraint adjustment” or

“Adjustable headrest” in this section for

head restraint or headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

WRS0699 Front passenger position

LRS0454

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

Booster seat installation on

passenger’s side jump seat only (King

cab models only)

WARNING

●Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat with-

out unfolding the seat extender.

●A child restraint system will not be in-

stalled properly and the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Never install a child restraint system

on the driver’s side jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint system

on the passenger’s side jump seat

without unfolding the seat extender.

●To install a rear-facing child restraint on

the passenger’s side jump seat, it will

be necessary to move the front passen-

ger’s seat fully forward and place the

front seatback upright or tilt it forward.

Failure to do so may cause the child

restraint to not be installed properly

and cause serious injury or death in a

sudden stop or collision.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

– The front seat cannot be used when a

rear-facing child restraint is installed

on the jump seat. Attempting to do so

could cause serious injury in a sud-

den stop or collision.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the

Automatic Locking Retractor mode when

using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”

sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

passenger’s side jump seat only: 1. To access the jump seat extension s

1on the

passenger’s side jump seat only pull up s

on the extension to unfold it to the open

position. Then unfold the two support legs

3and lower the jump seat to the full open

4seating position.

LRS0559 LRS0537

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest

to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest

when the booster seat is removed. See

“Adjustable headrest” in this section for

headrest adjustment, removal and installa-

tion information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable headrest and it is interfering with

the proper booster seat fit, try another seat-

ing position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the following systems:

●Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest area of the

driver and front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

LRS0539

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact or rollover

collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-

over air bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both

curtain and rollover air bags are designed to

inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute

for them. Seat belts should always be correctly

worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-

tance away from the steering wheel, instrument

panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier

in this section for instructions and precautions on

seat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

WRS0031

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

Advanced Air Bag System monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt us-

age then inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. This sensor is only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly seated

and wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. See “Front passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain and rollover air bags

inflate if they are not properly re-

strained. Pre-teens and children should

be properly restrained in the rear seat, if

possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. See “Child re-

straints” earlier in this section for

details.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain and roll-

over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in

the event of a frontal impact, rear im-

pact, or lower severity side collision.

Always wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain and rollover air bags are most

effective when you are sitting well back

and upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain and rollover air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification system control

unit

7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt buckle switches

10. Seat belt with pretensioner

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

LRS0565

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.

The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper front air bag system opera-

tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage inflators. It also monitors information from

the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit

(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-

sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-

ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it

additionally monitors the weight of an occupant

or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based

on information from the sensors, only one front air

bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the

crash severity and whether the front occupants

are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front

passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the

weight detected on the passenger seat and how

the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be

illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will

not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical away

from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The

front air bags inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can increase the

risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some con-

ditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-

essary for most effective protection. Fail-

ure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light is

located near the climate controls. The light oper-

ates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light is OFF to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used

to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification

sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the

front passenger seat cushion and is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat by

weight. It works together with seat belt sensors

described later. For example, if a child is in the

front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag

OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a

child restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s

weight can be detected and cause the air bag to

turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-

tion can vary depending on the front passenger

seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-

signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the

amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when

it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

weight on the seat detected by the occupant

classification sensor and the belt tension de-

tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag

System determines whether the front passenger

air bag should be automatically turned OFF as

required by the regulations.

WRS0475

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the passen-

ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-

ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn

the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant

improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode,

this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat

belt properly for the most effective protection by

the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children

be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also

recommends that appropriate child restraints and

booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classification

sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to op-

erate as described above to turn the front passen-

ger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to properly se-

cure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger

air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF.

See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for

proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-

tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-

ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating

that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

installed properly, the seat belt is used properly

and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-

minate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front passenger

seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag

status light will go from OFF to ON for a few

seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system

operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-

tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensor (pressure sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should

not be modified or disconnected. Unau-

thorized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield could

affect the function of the supplemental

air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-

over air bags are located in the side roof rails.

These systems are designed to meet voluntary

guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to

out-of-position occupants. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags

are designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity side impact. They are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli-

sions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to

inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements

(for example, during severe off roading) may

cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain and

rollover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not

harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should

be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags

help to cushion the impact force to the head of

occupants in the front and rear outboard seating

positions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag

or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain

and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to

the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the

occupants. Because of this, the force of the side

air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-

flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags operate only when the ignition

switch is in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0422

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain and rollover air bag system

components will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain and rollover

air bag systems. This is to prevent dam-

age to or accidental inflation of the side

air bag and curtain and rollover air bag

systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain and rollover air bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain and rollover air bag systems

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

Installation of electrical equipment

should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the side air bag or cur-

tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front

seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioners cannot be reused af-

ter activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but a pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if nec-

essary, replaced by your NISSAN

dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioners. Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction

with the front air bag system. The pretensioner

system also activates with the curtain and rollover

air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or

near rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac-

tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same way

as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-

tem, the supplemental air bag warning

light will not come on, will flash intermit-

tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on

after the ignition switch has been placed in the

ON or START position. In this case, the preten-

sioner system may not function properly. They

must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle

to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WRS0885

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact

air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt

pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in-

clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone

sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, occu-

pant classification sensor, front air bag modules,

side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bag

modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not op-

erate in an accident. To help avoid injury

to yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and

rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed

to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,

unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag

warning light remains illuminated after inflation

has occurred. Repair and replacement of these

supplemental air bag systems should be done

only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and

rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts

should be pointed out to the person performing

the maintenance. The ignition switch should al-

ways be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,

the air bag module will not function

again and must be replaced. Addition-

ally, if any of the front air bags inflate,

the activated pretensioners must also

be replaced. The air bag module and

pretensioner should be replaced by a

NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and

pretensioner cannot be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

and rollover air bag systems and the

pretensioner system should be in-

spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of a supplemen-

tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the

vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-

rect disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Trip computer (if so equipped) ...................2-5

Tachometer ....................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) ........2-8

Voltmeter (if so equipped) .......................2-8

Compass and outside temperature display

(if so equipped) ...................................2-9

Outside temperature display .....................2-9

Compass display ..............................2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......2-13

Checking bulbs ...............................2-14

Warning lights ................................2-14

Indicator lights ................................2-18

Audible reminders .............................2-22

Security systems (if so equipped) ..................2-23

Vehicle security system (if so equipped)..........2-23

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system

(if so equipped) ...............................2-24

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-25

Switch operation ..............................2-25

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-26

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-26

Headlight control switch........................2-26

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-29

Instrument brightness control ...................2-29

Turn signal switch .............................2-30

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-30

Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-30

Horn ............................................2-31

Cargo lamp switch ...............................2-31

Heated seat (if so equipped).......................2-32

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-32

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)..........2-33

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

switch (if so equipped) ............................2-34

Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-35

Power outlet .....................................2-35

Storage .........................................2-36

Storage trays .................................2-36

Under-seat storage bins........................2-38

Console box ..................................2-39

Glove box ....................................2-40

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) ..............2-40

Map pockets..................................2-41

Seat pocket (if so equipped)....................2-42

Cup holders ..................................2-42

Roof rack (if so equipped) ......................2-44

Windows ........................................2-45

Power windows (if so equipped) ................2-45

Manual windows (if so equipped)................2-47

Rear sliding window (if so equipped) ............2-48

Moonroof (if so equipped) .........................2-48

Interior lights .....................................2-50

Map lights (if so equipped) ........................2-51

HomeLinkTuniversal transceiver (if so equipped).....2-51

Programming HomeLinkT.......................2-52

Programming HomeLinkTfor Canadian

customers ....................................2-53

Operating the HomeLinkTuniversal

transceiver....................................2-53

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-53

Clearing the programmed information ............2-54

Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton ......2-54

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-54

1. Vents (P. 4-2)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-26)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System (if so equipped)

(P. 4-35, P. 4-37)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-57, P. 2-31)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-36)

9. Audio system controls (if so equipped)

(P. 4-17)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)

12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-66)

13. Auxiliary audio input jack

(if so equipped) (P. 4-34)

14. Power outlet (P. 2-35)

LIC1422

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch

(if so equipped) (P.2-34)

Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)

16. Shift selector (P. 5-13,5-17 )

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-22)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P.4-10)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)

20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)

21. Tilt steering wheel control

(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)

22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-31)

23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)

24. Outside mirror controls (if so equipped)

(P. 3-15) 1. Warning/indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Voltmeter (if so equipped)

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip

computer (if so equipped)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge

(if so equipped)

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

WIC1040

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Speedometer

2. Odometer/Twin trip odometer

3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,

pushing the change button changes the display

as follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

WIC0912 With twin trip odometer

LIC0780

2-4 Instruments and controls

For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-

ing the change button changes the display as

follows:

Trip →Trip →Distance to Empty →

Average speed →Average fuel consumption →

Journey time →Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-

puter” later in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-

ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer

to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display of the trip computer is situated in the

speedometer display. When the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, the display scrolls all

the modes of the trip computer and then shows

the mode chosen before the ignition switch was

placed in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the trip computer change

button. The following modes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-

ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the

fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is

automatically selected and the digits blink in or-

der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the

change button if you wish to return to the mode

that was selected before the warning occurred.

The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the

vehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to (----).

NOTE:

●If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done

by pressing the change button for more than

approximately 1 second. The display is updated

every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a

reset, the display shows (----).

With trip computer

LIC0781

Instruments and controls 2-5

Average fuel consumption (Mpg or

l/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the change button

for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-

play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the

first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Journey time

The journey time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

pressing the change button for more than ap-

proximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-

onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-

tance to empty (dte).

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone s

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range s

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC0738 LIC0739

2-6 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency”section for immediate

action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as

possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in

this section.

LIC0740

Instruments and controls 2-7

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if

so equipped)

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The

needle should be in the middle of the gauge when

the engine is running.

CAUTION

●This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

●If the gauge needle does not move with

the proper amount of engine oil, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer. Continued vehicle operation in

such a condition could cause serious

damage to the engine.

VOLTMETER (if so equipped)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-

erator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below

the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal

range (11 - 15 volts) s

1while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging system

is not functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC0741 WIC0913

2-8 Instruments and controls

This unit has the following functions:

●Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi-

cates heading direction of vehicle

●Indicates outside air temperature

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the button as described in the chart below

to activate various features of the automatic anti-

glare review mirror.

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass/outside temperature dis-

play toggles on/off

3 seconds Outside temperature display toggles

between °F and °C

8 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare

feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview

mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Push the button for about 1 second when

the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the

outside temperature and compass direction dis-

play s

1on or off.

●To change from °F to °C, push and hold

the button for about 3 seconds until

the display begins to flash. Press the button

again to toggle between °F and °C. Once

you have selected °F or °C, the display will

continue to flash for about 5 seconds, then

the temperature will display.

●When the outside temperature is between

140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the display

will read 140°F (60°C). When the tempera-

ture is above 194°F (90°C), the display will

read “SC”.

●When the outside temperature is between

-40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), the dis-

play will read -40°F (-40°C). When the tem-

perature is below -60°F (-51°C), the display

will read “OC”.

●The outside temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be

affected by road or engine heat, wind direc-

tion and other driving conditions. The display

may differ from the actual outside tempera-

ture or the temperature displayed on various

signs or billboards.

●Temperature display will not update unless

the vehicle is moving faster than 12 MPH

(20 km/h), or the ignition switch has been

OFF for 4 hours.

LIC0583

COMPASS AND OUTSIDE

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-9

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the button for about 1 second when

the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the

outside temperature and compass direction dis-

play s

1on or off. The display will indicate the

direction of the vehicle’s heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “CAL”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about 8

seconds. The current zone number will ap-

pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle

through the zone numbers until the desired

number appears in the display. Once you

have selected a zone number, the display

will show a compass direction within a few

seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automatic

correction function. If the correct direction is not

shown, follow this procedure.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-11

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the button for about 10 seconds. The

“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-

minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum

speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

●If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjustment,

have the compass checked at an authorized

dealer.

●The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving up

or down a steep hill. (The compass returns

to the correct compass point when the ve-

hicle moves to an area where the geomag-

netism is stabilized.)

●If a magnet is located in or near the overhead

console in the front of the vehicle or the

vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag-

netism is disturbed, the compass display

may not indicate the correct direction.

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

2-12 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control system on indicator light (if

so equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warning

light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light

(model)

Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light (A/T models only)

or Brake warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light

(if so equipped)

Security indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so

equipped)

Slip indicator light for models with ABLS (if so

equipped)

Door open warning light Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light for models with VDC (if so

equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem on indicator light (if so equipped)

Transfer 4LO position indicator light

(model)

4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-13

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and turn the ignition key to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

or , , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

an open circuit in the electrical system.

Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light illuminates and then turns off. This

indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See

“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion.

Automatic transmission oil

temperature warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-

sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes

on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as

soon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/T

oil temperature warning light is on may

damage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission park

warning light ( model)

WARNING

●If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that

the automatic transmission P (Park) po-

sition will not function and the transfer

case is in neutral.

●When parking, always make sure that

the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates

and the parking brake is set. Failure to

engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H

or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov-

ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious

personal injury or property damage.

●Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H

or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP

warning light when the shift selector is

in the P position and the ATP warning

light is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD

switch into the 4LO position, move the

shift selector into the N position once,

shift the shift selector into P again and

make sure the ATP warning light is

OFF.)

2-14 Instruments and controls

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-

sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-

fer control is not secured in any drive position

while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,

the transmission will disengage and the drive

wheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

●Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely. Refer to “Variable

voltage control system” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section later

in this manual.

●Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

Instruments and controls 2-15

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

4WD warning light (

model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after

the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,

the warning light will either remain illuminated or

blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting

and driving” section.

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on or blinks

during operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD

warning light turns on when you are

driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for automatic

transmission models, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift selector to

the N position with the brake pedal

depressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-

mission models, stop the vehicle and

shift the shift selector to the N posi-

tion with the clutch pedal depressed

and shift the 4WD shift switch to

2WD,

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge needle

reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

2-16 Instruments and controls

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-

sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”

section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still comes on while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-

place it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Low windshield washer fluid

warning light

This light comes on when the windshield washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid

as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is in the ON or START

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-over air bag,

and pretensioner systems need servicing and

your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioners may not function properly. For addi-

tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-

tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain and roll-over air bag

systems, and/or pretensioner systems will

not operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your ve-

hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission

position indicator light (if so

equipped)

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Cruise set switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the light

blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

Electronic locking rear

differential (E-Lock) system on

indicator light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic locking

rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully

engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the system is first

turned on. When the system fully engages, the

light remains on. If the switch is on and the

indicator light continues to flash, the system is

not engaged.

For additional information, see “Electronic lock-

ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” later

in this section and “Electronic locking rear differ-

ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

4WD shift indicator light

(model)

The light should turn off within 1 second after

placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-

cator light will illuminate the position selected by

the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode to the

other.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat

is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,

see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system on

indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and then turns

off.

The light comes on when the hill descent control

system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and the

indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on or blink

when the hill descent switch is on, the system

may not be functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-

trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descent

control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come

on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons

(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-

ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn off after

a few driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to

the dealer.

●Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking

and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected

by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light

(A/T models only)

This light comes on when the overdrive function

is OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function is

controlled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light (if so

equipped)

This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the

OFF, LOCK or ACC position. The blinking secu-

rity indicator light indicates that the security sys-

tems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-

tems” later in this section.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Slip indicator light for models

with ABLS (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on if the active brake

limited slip is activated. If activated, the system

will apply braking to the slipping drive wheel(s),

giving the non-slipping wheel(s) more traction.

Slip indicator light for models

with VDC (if so equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction

control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery

road conditions may exist if the slip indicator

blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving

accordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when you

turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light does not come on or does

not go off, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-

tion control system is disabled and the slip indi-

cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

To reset the system, you must perform the reset

procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing the

reset procedure, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO position indicator

light ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to ON.

This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is

set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch in

the ON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the

switch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator

light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch

to 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shifting

from one drive mode to the other.

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and

remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the

transmission into gear. If the shift selector is

shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other

gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the

vehicle may move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow the

instructions below:

●For automatic transmission models, stop the

vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N

(Neutral) position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, then depress and turn the 4WD

shift switch to 4LO or 4H.

●For manual transmission models, stop the

vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N

(Neutral) position with the clutch pedal de-

pressed, then depress and turn the 4WD

shift switch to 4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch

between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle

and shift the shift selector to the N position with

the brake pedal (AT models) or clutch pedal (MT

models) depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the

transfer case is in the 4LO position (

model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control

system is not functioning properly. This indicates

the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-

ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch

again or restart the engine and the system will

operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on

when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic

Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and the

VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. To reset the system, you must perform

the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing the

reset procedure, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear

the system working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC

light will illuminate when the electronic locking

rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so

equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is

engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or the

switch is turned off, the VDC system will be

enabled and the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove

the key and take it with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-

tems:

●Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so

equipped)

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

when the system is armed. It is not, however, a

motion detection-type system that activates

when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration

occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with the key, power door lock

switch (if the door is opened, locked and

then closed), or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

●Push the button on the keyfob.

All doors lock. The hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once to indicate

all doors are locked.

●When the button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to

“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The light stays on for about 30

seconds. The vehicle security system is now

pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-

hicle security system automatically shifts

into the armed phase. The light begins

to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the

30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s

door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or

the ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON

position, the system will not arm.

LIC0359

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-23

●If the key is turned slowly when locking

the driver’s door, the system may not

arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned

beyond the vertical position toward the

unlock position to remove the key, the

system may be disarmed when the key

is removed. If the indicator light fails to

glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door

once and lock it again.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors closed and locked

with the ignition switch placed in the

OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

the driver’s door with the key or by pressing

the button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening a door without using the key or

keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using

the inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s

door with the key or by pressing the button

on the keyfob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC

Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT

ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have when visiting

your NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

A(Slower) or s

B(Faster).

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Push the lever up s

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

LIC0474 WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-25

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

2When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all the other

lights remain on.

LIC1419 Type A

WIC1424

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-26 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically. The

autolight system can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after

you turn the key to OFF and all doors are

closed.

Type B

WIC1452

Type C

WIC1426 WIC1453

Instruments and controls 2-27

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion s

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is

opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position. Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor s

1located in the top

side of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the switch in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off after

5 minutes.

LIC0835 WIC1427

2-28 Instruments and controls

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,

the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if

the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position

and then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-

duced intensity when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime running

lights operate with the headlight switch in the

OFF position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates when

the headlight control switch is in the AUTO (if so

equipped), or position.

Turn the control s

Ato adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel lights when driving at night.

WIC0917

Instruments and controls 2-29

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where the indicator light

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch

in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-

lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to

the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

WIC1428 LIC0393 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

2-30 Instruments and controls

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To sound the horn, push the area between the

horn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch down

to the ON position.

CAUTION

Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF

position when you leave the vehicle for

extended periods of time, otherwise the

battery will go dead.

WIC1449 LIC0616

HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-31

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired, depending on the temperature. The

indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

CAUTION

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by your NISSAN dealer.

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-

ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine

to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

LIC1041 WIC0534

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully when using the

hill descent control system and decel-

erate the vehicle speed by depressing

the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-

cially careful when driving on frozen,

muddy or extremely steep downhill

roads. Failure to control vehicle speed

may result in a loss of control of the

vehicle and possible serious injury or

death.

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-

erates continuously for a long time, the

temperature of the brake pads may in-

crease and the hill descent control system

may be temporarily disabled (the indicator

light will blink). If the indicator light does

not come on continuously after blinking,

stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designed to

reduce driver workload when going down steep

hills. The hill descent control system helps to

control vehicle speed so the driver can concen-

trate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position

and the vehicle speed must be under 15

mph (25 km/h) or

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position

and the vehicle speed must be under 21

mph (35 km/h), and

●the hill descent control system switch must

be ON.

The hill descent control system on indicator light

will come on when the system is activated. Also,

the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent

control system applies the brakes to control ve-

hicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control system on indicator light

blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for

system activation are not met or if the system

becomes disengaged for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system, push

the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-

trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec-

tion and “Hill descent control system” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

LIC0743

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33

The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock)

system can help provide added traction if the

vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position

(4-wheel drive vehicles),

●the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4

mph (7 km/h) or less, and

●the E-Lock system switch must be turned

ON.

When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi-

cator light will flash until the system engages.

However, if all operation conditions listed above

are not met or the system becomes disengaged,

the indicator light will continue to flash.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled

and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock

system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light

illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system” in the “Starting and Driving” section for

further explanation and system limitations.

WARNING

●Never leave the E-Lock system ON

when driving on paved or hard-surfaced

roads. Turning the vehicle may result in

the rear wheels slipping and result in an

accident and personal injury. After us-

ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-

hicle, turn the system OFF.

●Use the E-Lock system only when free-

ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position

before using the E-Lock system. Never

use the E-Lock system on a slippery

road surface such as snow or ice sur-

face. Using the E-Lock system when

driving in these road conditions may

cause unexpected movement of the ve-

hicle during engine braking, accelerat-

ing or turning, which may result in an

accident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●After using the E-Lock system, turn the

switch OFF to prevent possible damage

to driveline components from extended

use.

●Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)

when the system is engaged. Doing so

could result in possible damage to the

driveline.

●Do not turn on the E-lock system while

the tires are spinning. Doing so could

damage drivetrain components.

LIC0729

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM

SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-34 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Pay special attention to your surround-

ings when using the clutch interlock

switch. The vehicle will move forward or

backward according to the gear selected.

The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allows

for starting the engine without depressing the

clutch pedal. This feature helps you restart the

engine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For

example, the engine stops on a steep hill and a

slight movement forward or backward might be

dangerous.)

To use the clutch interlock switch:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot.

3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal and

release the parking brake.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

5. Press and release the clutch interlock

switch. The CANCEL light on the switch will

illuminate.

6. Turn the ignition to the START position to

start the engine and, at the same time, de-

press the accelerator pedal with your right

foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take

your left foot off the brake. Once the engine

has started, the clutch interlock switch

CANCEL light shuts off. Do not use the

interlock switch to start the engine under

normal driving conditions.

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones.

The bottom power outlet located on instrument

panel is powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The power outlet located inside the center con-

sole is powered only when the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

WIC0817 Front row

LIC1430

CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)

SWITCH (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-35

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. See your NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

●Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the

outlet. STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

Center console

LIC0761

Top center tray

LIC1539

STORAGE

2-36 Instruments and controls

AT model

LIC0818

MT model — Type A (if so equipped)

WIC1431

MT model — Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1432

Instruments and controls 2-37

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

●The cargo restrained in the under-seat

storage bins must not exceed the

weight limits listed below or the bins

may not stay secured. In a sudden stop

or collision, the unsecured bins could

cause personal inury.

King cab model: 16 lb (7.25 kg)

Crew cab model

Driver’s side: 16 lb (7.25 kg)

Passenger’s side: 25 lb (11.33 kg)

●If the under-seat storage bins are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

2nd row under-seat storage bin

(King cab model)

LIC0821 2nd row under-seat storage bin

(Crew cab model)

LIC0820

2-38 Instruments and controls

●Do not place sharp objects in the under-

seat storage bins. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury when the vehicle is moving

or if the vehicle is involved in a collision.

To access the under-seat storage bins:

For King cab model, lift up the jump seat. Refer to

“Jump seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section earlier in

this manual.

For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat.

Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the

“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section earlier in this manual. To remove the under-seat storage bins:

1. Remove the storage net.

2. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the stor-

age bin (King cab model).

3. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position s

To install the under-seat storage bins:

1. Position the under-seat storage bin so the

holes line up with the holes in the floorboard.

2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the LOCK

position s

CONSOLE BOX

Pull up on the lever s

1to open the console box lid

LIC0822 LIC0766

Instruments and controls 2-39

GLOVE BOX

To open the top portion of the glove box, push the

latch s

Aup and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull

the handle s

Bdown and lower the lid.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so

equipped)

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

●Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

LIC0768 WIC0673

2-40 Instruments and controls

MAP POCKETS

WIC0824 King cab model

LIC0826

Crew cab model

LIC0825

Instruments and controls 2-41

SEAT POCKET (if so equipped)

A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s

seat.

CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holders have adapters that can be

removed to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

LIC0575 Front

WIC0827

2-42 Instruments and controls

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front

console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. If

stepped on, the cup holder is designed to snap

loose from the console. To re-install, close the

cup holder assembly and push it back into the

console opening.

To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first close

the cup holder.

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

2nd row (rear of front console)

WIC0771

Bottle holder (front row)

LIC0784

Bottle holder (2nd row, Crew cab)

WIC0828

Instruments and controls 2-43

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

roof rack.

●Heavy loading of the roof rack has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or abnor-

mal handling maneuvers.

●Roof rack load should be evenly

distributed.

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack load

weight capacity.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items

from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-

ably lift the items onto the roof rack from

the ground, use a ladder or stool.

WIC0857

2-44 Instruments and controls

Always evenly distribute the cargo on the tubular

roof rack. The maximum total load is 125 lb

(56 kg) evenly distributed. Be careful that your

vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR front and rear). The

GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S.

label (located on the driver’s side door jamb

pillar). For more information regarding GVWR

and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion later in this manual.

The front crossbar can be adjusted or removed.

Use the Torxdriver provided in the tool kit to

loosen both crossbar adjusting screws.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

Torxdriver s

1by turning counterclockwise

2. When the clamp is loosened, move the

crossbar so the cargo can be positioned on

the crossbar s

3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws with

the Torxdriver by turning clockwise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar

adjusting screws.

To remove:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

Torxdriver s

1by turning counterclockwise

2. Rotate the clamps s

3. Remove the crossbar.

4. Reverse to install.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar

adjusting screws.

If you hear wind noise coming from the roof rack

while driving, adjust the roof rack crossbar to the

neutral position, rearward of Don the side rails.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch

to prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for about

45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-45

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side window switch

4. Right rear passenger window switch

(Crew Cab models only)

5. Left rear passenger window switch

(Crew Cab models only)

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it

down. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function

at any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window, push the switch and hold it down s

To close the window, pull the switch up s

LIC1329 LIC0786

2-46 Instruments and controls

Rear power window switch (Crew

Cab models only)

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding passenger window. To

open the window, push the switch and hold it

down s

1. To close the window, push the switch

up s

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed by

turning the hand crank on each door.

LIC0787 LIC0410 WIC0263

Instruments and controls 2-47

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so

equipped)

Squeeze the handles of the lever s

1, then slide

the window open s

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-

ward DOWN/OPEN s

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch

toward UP/CLOSE s

To open or close the moonroof part way, push the

switch in any direction while the moonroof is

sliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing the switch to-

ward UP/CLOSE s

2. Release the switch, then

push the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the

moonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch to-

ward DOWN/OPEN s

Restarting the moonroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after

the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-

cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality

detected. Use the following reset procedure to

return moonroof operation to normal.

1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting

switch repeatedly toward the

DOWN/OPEN s

1position to fully close the

lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more

than 2 seconds toward the DOWN/OPEN

1position to reestablish the lid’s home

position.

The moonroof should now operate normally.

WIC0856 WIC0882

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-48 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof

will immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-

mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the moonroof will fully close

gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the

moonroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the

moonroof.

Instruments and controls 2-49

The interior lights have a three-position switch

and operate regardless of ignition switch posi-

tion.

When the switch is in the ON position s

1, the

interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-

tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes

unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

When the switch is in the O position s

2, the

interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds

when:

●The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed and the ignition switch is in the

OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is

activated when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a

key, or the power door lock switch.

●The ignition switch is turned ON.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-

utes while doors are open to prevent the battery

from becoming discharged.

When the switch is in the OFF position s

3, the

interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door

position.

Type A

LIC0789

Type B

LIC0792

Type C

LIC0630

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-50 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

To turn the map lights on, press the lenses. To

turn them off, press the lenses of the lights again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of up

to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLinkTwill retain all program-

ming.

Once the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

LIC0791

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-51

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLinkT

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer

HomeLinkTbuttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light s

1blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLinkTbutton you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLinkTflashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing

blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-

ing light indicates successful programming.

To activate the garage door or other pro-

WIC0986 WIC0987

2-52 Instruments and controls

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLinkTbutton — releasing

when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkTblinks

rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLinkThas picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLinkTto complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another per-

son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-

gram button located on the garage door

opener’s motor to activate the “training

mode”. This button is usually located near

the antenna wire that hangs down from the

motor. If the wire originates from under a

light lens, you will need to remove the lens to

access the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the

program button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.

Use the help of a second person for conve-

nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-

ing the garage door opener’s program but-

ton, quickly and firmly press and release the

HomeLinkTbutton you’ve just programmed.

Press and release the HomeLinkTbutton up

to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkTbutton should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining

HomeLinkTbuttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLinkTbuttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLinkTbuttons, refer to

the HomeLinkTweb site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKTFOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-

onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to

HomeLinkT, continue to press and hold the

HomeLinkTbutton (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-

gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-

press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly

(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-

ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-

sible damage to the garage door opener

components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKT

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver (once pro-

grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-

rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-

propriate programmed HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLinkTdoes not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

●press and hold both the HomeLinkTand

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

Instruments and controls 2-53

●position the hand-held transmitter1-3

inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface. Hold the transmitter in

that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLinkTis not programmed within that

time, try holding the transmitter in another

position – keeping the indicator light in view

at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,

to clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINKTBUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkTbut-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the

hand-held transmitter1-3inches (26 - 76

mm) away from the HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLinkTindicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver button has

now been reprogrammed. The new device can

be activated by pushing the HomeLinkTbutton

that was just programmed. This procedure will

not affect any other programmed HomeLinkT

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLinkTUniver-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference and (2) This device must accept

any interference that may be received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690

2-54 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys

(if so equipped) ................................3-2

Doors ............................................3-3

Locking with key................................3-3

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-4

Locking with power door lock switch

(if so equipped) ................................3-4

Rear doors (King Cab models) ...................3-5

Automatic door locks (if so equipped).............3-5

Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab

models only) ...................................3-6

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped).........3-6

How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-7

Hood ...........................................3-10

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-10

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-10

Steering wheel ...................................3-12

Tilt operation (if so equipped) ...................3-12

Sun visors .......................................3-12

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-13

Mirrors ..........................................3-13

Rearview mirror (if so equipped).................3-13

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-14

Outside mirrors ...............................3-14

Truck box ........................................3-15

Tailgate.......................................3-15

Bed Extender (if so equipped) ..................3-17

Tie down hooks (if so equipped) ................3-18

1. Two master keys (black) with transponder

chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on

one side.

2. Transponder chip

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep the plate in a

safe place (such as your wallet), not in the ve-

hicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer

for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN

does not record key numbers so it is very impor-

tant to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

key which is registered to the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

This key has a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used

with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to

your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase the

memory of all key codes previously registered

into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these components

will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time

of registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which

contains an electrical transponder, to come into

contact with salt water. This could affect system

function.

LPD0348

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors can not be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally open-

ing the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the

vehicle s

1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral s

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks

all doors s

Driver’s side

WPD0311 LPD0240

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position s

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position s

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position s

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position s

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock

position with the key in the ignition switch and any

door open, all doors will lock and then unlock

automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from

being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

Inside lock

LPD0298

Door lock switch

WPD0381

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REAR DOORS (King Cab models)

1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

2. From the outside, pull the door handle s

toward you. 3. Open the door to the desired position.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so

equipped)

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

●For automatic transmission models: All

doors unlock automatically when the trans-

mission is placed in the P (Park) position.

●For manual transmission models: All doors

unlock automatically when the key is re-

moved from the ignition switch.

LPD0278 LPD0312 WPD0313

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

The automatic lock and unlock functions

can be deactivated or activated indepen-

dently of each other. To deactivate or activate

the automatic door lock or unlock system, per-

form the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of

performing Step #2:

●To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:

push and hold the power door lock switch

to the position (UNLOCK) for more

than 5 seconds.

●To change AUTO LOCK settings: push

and hold the power door lock switch to

the position (LOCK) for more

than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard warning lights

will flash twice. When deactivated, the haz-

ard warning lights will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(Crew Cab models only)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-

mits radio waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

remote keyless entry keyfob while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the

interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective

distance depends on the conditions around the

vehicle.

WPD0314

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged

●the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the keyfob:

●Do not allow the keyfob, which contains

electrical components, to come into

contact with water or salt water. This

could affect the system function.

●Do not drop the keyfob.

●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against

another object.

●Do not change or modify the keyfob.

●Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the

keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

●Do not place the keyfob for an extended

period in an area where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the keyfob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the keyfob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and per-

sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key-

fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-

authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing proce-

dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. All

the doors lock. The hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once to

indicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

●When the button is pressed with

all doors locked, the hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once as a

reminder that the doors are already

locked.

●If a door is open and you press

the button, the doors will lock

but the horn will not beep and the hazard

lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silenc-

ing the horn beep feature” in this section for

details.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

●Only the driver’s door unlocks.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed with the ignition

switch in any position except the ON posi-

tion.

●The interior lights illuminate for 30 seconds

when the interior light switch is in the normal

operation position.

Press the button on the keyfob again

within 5 seconds.

●All doors unlock.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-

ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the

ignition switch and placing the ignition switch in

the ON or START position, locking the doors with

the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to

the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,

all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute

unless one of the following operations is per-

formed:

●Any door is opened.

●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and

the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD0210

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once to

turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”

in the “Instruments and controls” section in this

manual.

LPD0211 LPD0262

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

1Pull the hood lock release handle located

below the driver’s side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

2Push the lever at the front of the hood to the

side as illustrated with your fingertips and

raise the hood.

3Insert the support rod into the slot on the

underside of the hood.

When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its

original position. Lower the hood approximately

12 inch (30 cm) above the latch and release it.

This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

LPD0302 LPD0263

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Loop the tether strap around the hook s

1while

refueling.

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the

cap a third of a turn, and wait for any

“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel

from spraying out and possibly causing

personal injury. Then remove the cap.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause the

malfunction indicator light to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

LPD0325

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

●Insert cap straight into the fuel-filler

tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler

cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light

illuminates because the fuel-filler cap

is loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

in this manual.

TILT OPERATION (if so equipped)

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the

steering wheel up or down to the desired posi-

tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel

in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

1To block glare from the front, swing down the

main sun visor.

2To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side.

LPD0304

WPD0315

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3Slide the sun visor extension (if so equipped)

in or out as needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

edly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the

mirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The night position s

1reduces glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

WPD0307 WPD0126

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims according to the intensity of the head-

lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic

anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s

1will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator light will

turn on.

For information on HomeLinkTUniversal Trans-

ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

For information on the compass and outside tem-

perature display, see “Compass and outside

temperature display”in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

2or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Manual control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror can be moved in any direction

for a better rear view.

WPD0333 WPD0170

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Electric control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is placed in the

ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch s

1to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch s

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, see “Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Foldable outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the

tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate

open.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches

are securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate

down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed

Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the

extended position.

LPD0237 LPD0259 LPD0270

TRUCK BOX

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loading

information” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly. Removing the tailgate

1. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

●The tailgate is heavy. Two people

should remove or install it. Be careful

not to drop it during removal.

●After releasing the support cables, do

not let the tailgate rest on the bumper.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side hinge.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side hinge.

Installing the tailgate

1. Insert the tailgate into the left side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and

insert into the right side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree

angle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely.

LPD0271

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking the tailgate

To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the pas-

senger side of the vehicle s

1. To unlock, turn the

key toward the driver side s

BED EXTENDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

●Do not overload the bed extender.

Maximum load on the open tailgate is

890N (200 lbs).

●Evenly distribute and properly secure

all cargo.

●Do not use the bed extender or tailgate

to secure cargo.

Positioning the bed extender

To use the bed extender in the inward position

perform the following:

1. Rotate the bed extender s

1toward the cab

of the truck.

2. Close the tailgate.

3. Place cargo inside the bed extender in the

truck bed.

4. Properly secure the cargo.

LPD0272 LPD0480

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

To use the bed extender in the outward position

perform the following:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender s

2away from the

cab of the truck until the extender sits on the

tailgate.

3. Lock the buckles s

3into the tailgate latch.

The bed extender can be adjusted in the outward

position by moving the extender along the rail.

NOTE:

Use care when rotating extender, buckles

may come in contact with the truck bed

railing.

Removing and installing the bed

extender

To remove or install the bed extender perform the

following:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical posi-

tion and lift straight up (to remove) or lower

straight down (to install).

To store the bed extender in the front of the truck

when not in use perform the following:

1. Position the sliding brackets past the center

of the wheel well.

2. Re-install the extender into the brackets (see

above).

3. Rotate the extender to the inward position.

4. Push the brackets forward until the extender

comes in contact with the front wall of the

truck box.

TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed

at each corner of the truck box. These may be

used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck

box.

●The weight of the cargo load must be evenly

distributed over both the front and the rear

axles.

●All cargo should be securely fastened with

ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or

sliding within the vehicle.

LPD0479 LTI0102

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

MEMO

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems

Vents ............................................4-2

Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A)..........4-2

Controls.......................................4-3

Heater operation ...............................4-4

Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) .........4-6

Air flow charts..................................4-7

Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B).........4-10

Controls......................................4-10

Heater operation ..............................4-11

Air conditioner operation .......................4-12

Air flow charts.................................4-14

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-17

Audio system ....................................4-17

Radio (if so equipped) .........................4-17

FM radio reception ............................4-17

AM radio reception ............................4-18

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-18

Audio operation precautions ....................4-18

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(Type A and B) (if so equipped) .................4-25

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer (if so equipped) .......................4-30

CD care and cleaning..........................4-35

Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) ...............................4-35

Antenna ......................................4-36

Car phone or CB radio............................4-36

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) ..................................4-37

Regulatory Information .........................4-39

Using the system ..............................4-39

Control buttons ...............................4-41

Getting started ................................4-42

List of voice commands ........................4-44

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode..................4-48

Manual Control................................4-50

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-51

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-

senger’s side windows s

1, driver and passenger

2, or center s

3vent by moving the vent slide

and/or vent assemblies.

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

LHA0534

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (Type A)

4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. Fan control dial

2. Temperature control dial

3. Air flow control dial

4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)

5. Air recirculation button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and

controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select the

air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling (air

conditioning).

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and the front and rear floor

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front and

rear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets

and the front and rear floor

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position:

Push the air recirculation button to recir-

culate air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on

the button will come on.

Push the button to the on position:

●when driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

Type A

WHA1384

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

OFF position:

Push the air recirculation button again to

turn air recirculation off. The indicator light on

the button will turn off. Outside air is drawn

into the passenger compartment and distributed

through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-

ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if so

equipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equipped

with an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired (1 - 4) position and push the

button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator

light comes on when the air conditioner is oper-

ating. To turn off the air conditioner, push

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF position

for normal heating. The indicator light on

the button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center vent.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the

temperature control lever to the full HOT

position.

4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light will not illuminate) if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F

(2°C). If the air flow control dial is in

the position for more than one minute,

the air conditioning system will continue to

operate until the fan control dial is turned to

OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air

flow control dial is turned to a position other

than the position. This dehumidifies

the air which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off, al-

lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-

senger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side and

center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.

When the temperature control dial is moved to

the full hot or full cool position, the air between

the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-

perature.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light on the button will

not come on) if the outside temperature is

more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow control

dial is in the position for more than

one minute, the air conditioning system will

continue to operate until the fan control dial

is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,

even if the air flow control dial is turned to a

position other than the position. This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The mode automatically

turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn

into the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if

so equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position, and push in the button to

activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-

tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions

are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, push the button to

the on position (indicator light on). Be sure

to return the button to the off position

for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

When the air flow control dial is in the

or position, the air conditioner automati-

cally turns on (however, the indicator light will not

illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). If one of these positions is selected

for more than one minute, the air conditioning

system will continue to operate until the fan con-

trol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,

even if the air flow control dial is turned to a

position other than these positions. This dehu-

midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-

partment to further improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows and moonroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air conditioner is

in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for two or three

minutes with the windows open to vent hot

air from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. For additional information

on heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-

ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation

() button should always be in the OFF

position for heating and defrosting.

WHA1385

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

WHA1386 WHA1387

4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WHA1388 WHA1389

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

1. Fan speed control dial

2. Front window defroster button

3. Rear window defroster switch (if so

equipped)

4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Max A/C button

7. Air flow control buttons

8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and

controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to select

the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling

(air conditioning).

Type B

WHA1406

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (Type B)

4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

●driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-

ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-

ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position and push the button to

turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light

comes on when the air conditioner is operating.

To turn off the air conditioner, push the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch (if so

equipped)

For more information about the rear window de-

froster switch, see “Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position

for normal heating. The indicator light on

the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center ventilators.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .

Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest

setting and the temperature control to the

full HOT position.

●

When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light on the button will not

come on) if the outside temperature is more

than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more

than one minute, the air conditioning system

will continue to operate until the fan control

dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or

the A/C button is used to turn off the com-

pressor even if the air flow control dial is

turned to a position other than the po-

sition. This dehumidifies the air which helps

defog the windshield. The mode auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side

and center vents and to the front and rear floor

outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light on the button will

not come on) if the outside temperature is

more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow

control button is selected for more than one

minute, the air conditioning system will con-

tinue to operate until the fan control dial is

turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the

A/C button is used to turn off the compres-

sor even if the air flow control dial is turned to

a position other than the position.

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The mode automati-

cally turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position, and push in the button to

activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-

tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions

are added to the heater operation.

4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Press the button. The indicator light

on the button will come on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, push the button to

the ON position. The indicator light on

the button will come on. Be sure to

return the to the OFF position for nor-

mal cooling. The indicator light on the

button will go off. You may also select MAX

A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the button will

go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Press the button on. The indicator

light on the button will come on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Press the button. The indicator light

comes on.

When the or positions are se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on

(however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if

the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

The air conditioning system will continue to op-

erate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF, the

air conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is

shut off, even if a position other than the air

flow control button is selected. This dehumidifies

the air which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-

partment to further improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3

minutes with the windows open to vent hot

air from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. For additional information

on heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-

ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation

() button should always be in the OFF

position for heating and defrosting.

WHA0916

4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WHA0917 WHA0918

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

WHA0919 WHA1362

4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-

mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO (if so equipped)

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi-

tion and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume)

knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition switch

should be turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is

selected unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and an XMTsatellite radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio can

only be installed in vehicles that were factory

pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

LHA0099

4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD changer/player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

changer.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (if

so equipped)

Terms:

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* WindowsTand Windows MediaTare regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Mi-

crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order chart WHA1078

4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for

folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there

will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

1. PRESET A·B·C button

2. CD eject button

3. MENU button

4. CD insert slot

5. CD button

6. FM·AM button

7. TUNE buttons

8. RPT button

9. PWR button/VOL control knob

10. RDM button

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. SEEK buttons

Type A WHA1075

4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. PRESET A·B·C button

2. CD eject button

3. FM·AM button

4. CD insert slot

5. CD button

6. MENU button

7. TUNE button

8. RPT button

9. PWR button/VOL control knob

10. RDM button

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. SEEK button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A and B) (if

so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-

tion precautions9earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

Power button and VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, then press the PWR (power) button. If

you listen to the radio with the engine not running,

place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The

mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off resumes play-

ing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the PWR button again turns the system

off.

Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase

volume or to the left to decrease volume.

Type B WHA1167

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-

ANCE and CLOCK):

Press the MENU button to change the mode as

follows:

BAS →TRE →FAD →BAL →CLOCK →Audio

→BAS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the MENU button until the desired mode appears

in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

use the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance

modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the

front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the

sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

NOTE:

If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU

button will change the mode as follows:

BAS →TRE →FAD →BAL →CLOCK →

Hour adjustment →Minute adjustment →

Audio →BAS

For more information on setting the clock, see

“Clock set” later in this section.

Clock operation

Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-

played; use the SEEK button to turn the clock

display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignition

switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to

select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-

ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the

SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until

CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK

button until CLK ON appears.

2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will

start flashing.

3. Press the SEEK button or to

adjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the display

will switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK

button or to adjust the minutes.

6. Press the MENU button again to exit the

clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock display

after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button

again to return to the regular clock display.

Resetting the time

Hold the MENU button down and then press the

TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-

lows:

●If the displayed minutes before the reset are

in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed

before the reset will stay the same and the

minutes will be reset to :00.

●If the displayed minutes before the reset are

in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed

before the reset will advance by one hour

and the minutes will be reset to :00.

For example, if the MENU button and the

TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time

displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display

will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed

while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the

display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the

display will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→

FM reception.

4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio automatically changes

from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE buttons:

Manual tuning

Press the TUNE or button for less

than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either TUNE or button down

for more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK buttons:

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK or button to seek

through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins

from low to high frequencies, or high to low

frequencies, depending on which button is

pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-

tion. Once the highest broadcasting station is

reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at

the lowest broadcasting station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to

the A, B and C preset button in any combination

of AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change

between storage banks. The radio displays

the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of

presets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual

TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)

until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes

when the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and carefully insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side up. The compact

disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts

to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns

off and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE (rewind and fast

forward) buttons:

When the TUNE or button is

pressed while the compact disc is playing, the

compact disc plays at an increased speed while

rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the compact disc returns to normal play

speed.

SEEK buttons:

When is pressed while the compact disc

is playing, the next track following the present

one starts to play from the beginning.

Press several times to skip several tracks.

Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-

vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-

pears in the display window. (When the last track

on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is

played.)

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

When is pressed, the track being played

returns to the beginning. Press several

times to skip back several tracks. Each time the

button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.

SEEK (Scan CDs) button:

Press and hold the SEEK button for more

than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10

seconds of a track on the compact disc. The

SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans through

all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK

or button is pressed during the scan

mode.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

1←→ Normal

1: The track that is currently playing will be re-

peated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

RDM ←→ Normal

RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-

ing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When the button is pressed while the

compact disc is being played, the compact disc

will eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded with the system on.

4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. PRESET A·B·C button

2. Display screen

3. DISP/CLOCK button

4. SEEK/TRACK button

5. CD button

6. RADIO button*

7. AUX button

8. SCAN RPT button

9. CAT FOLDER button

10. LOAD button

11. CD insert slot

12. CD eject button

13. VOL control knob and PWR button

14. Station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons

15. TUNE/TRACK knob and AUDIO button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the RADIO button is pressed to

access satellite radio stations unless

optional satellite receiver and antenna

are installed and an XMTsatellite radio

service subscription is active. Satellite

radio can only be installed in vehicles

that were factory pre-wired for satellite

radio. Satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

WHA1172

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if

so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-

tion precautions9earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available when the

RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an XMTsatellite radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio can

only be installed in vehicles that were factory

pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON, and then

press the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-

tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-

trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume

changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,

FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO control knob to change the

mode as follows:

BASS →MID →TREBLE →FADE →BALANCE

→SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and

Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired

mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning

knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired

level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust

Fade and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the right

and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or

HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set

1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until it

beeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CAT

FOLDER or button or SEEK

TRACK or button to adjust the

hours.

3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to

switch to the minute adjustment.

4. Press the CAT FOLDER or

button or SEEK TRACK or

button to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit

the clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock display

after 7 seconds, or you may press the

DISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-

lar clock display.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text about

MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.

4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CD

with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button

will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:

Disc title ←→ Track number ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode, press the

AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE

appears on the display, then rotate the knob to

select the following display modes: Disc number

←→ Folder number.

Once the display mode is selected, press the

AUDIO knob again to store the setting. If the

AUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, the

display will refresh with the last selected display

mode setting.

●Track title mode displays the title of the se-

lected CD track.

●Disc title mode displays the title of the CD

being played.

●Track number mode displays the number

selected disc and the track that is currently

being played on the disk.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to an

MP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CD

with text is being used), press the DISP button.

The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as

follows: File name ←→ Folder title ←→ Art-

ist ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.

To change the default display mode, press the

AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE

appears on the display, then rotate the knob to

select the following display modes: File name

←→ Folder title ←→ Artist ←→ Disc number

←→ Folder number.

Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-

DIO knob again to store the setting.

●Folder number mode displays the selected

folder number and the track number that is

currently being played.

●Disc number mode displays the selected

disc number and the track number that is

currently being played.

●Artist mode displays the artist title of the

MP3/WMA file.

●File name mode displays the track title of the

MP3/WMA file.

●Folder title mode displays the folder name

given to the MP3 folder.

Display satellite radio display mode (if so

equipped)

To change the text displayed when listening to

satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP

button. The DISP button will scroll through the

broadcast information as follows: Name ←→

Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press the

AUDIO button to display mode and press the

TUNE button to select the following display

modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name

←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is

selected press the AUDIO button again to store

the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed

after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the

last selected display mode setting.

●Channel number mode displays the channel

number of the selected satellite radio sta-

tion.

●Channel name mode displays the channel

name of the selected satellite radio station.

●Name mode displays the name of the artist,

host or weather condition of the selected

satellite radio station.

●Title mode displays the song title, show

name, or temperature of the selected satel-

lite radio station.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the RADIO button will change the band

as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pushed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the PWR/VOL control knob is depressed to ON.

No satellite radio reception is available when the

RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an XMTsatellite radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio can

only be installed in vehicles that were factory

pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite

radio is not operational then the RADIO button is

used to toggle between AM and FM bands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

button is pushed, the compact disc will automati-

cally be turned off and the last radio station

played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically change

from stereo to monaural reception.

CAT FOLDER (tuning)

button:

To manually tune the radio, press the CAT

FOLDER button or or turn the tun-

ing knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either the or button down for

more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK tuning

button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or

for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low

or low to high frequencies and stop at the next

broadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press and

hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5

seconds. When the button is released the radio

will seek to the next broadcasting station.

SCAN RPT tuning:

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5

seconds to stop at each broadcasting station

(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop scan tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT

button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan

tuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-

tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT

(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C

preset button in any combination of FM, AM or

SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the

PRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station

band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data

information service transmitted by some radio

stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but

many stations are now considering broadcasting

RDS data.

RDS can display:

●Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

●Station name, such as “The Groove”.

●Music or programming type such as “Clas-

sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

●Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOAD

button.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOL

control knob will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs

in the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load

button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select

button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the

load button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the

display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio

will automatically be turned off and the compact

disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the button is pressed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

track being played returns to its beginning. Press

several times to skip back through tracks. The

compact disc will go back the number of times

the button is pressed.

When the button is pressed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,

the next track will start to play from its beginning.

Press several times to skip through tracks. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pressed. (When the last track on the

compact disc is skipped through, the first track

will be played.)

CAT FOLDER button:

While playing a CD, press and hold the CAT

FOLDER button or to fast forward

or rewind a track on a CD.

MP3 CAT FOLDER button:

While playing an MP3 CD, press the CAT

FOLDER button or to scan back-

ward or forward through available folders.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

Press and hold the CAT FOLDER button

or to fast forward or rewind a track on an

MP3 CD.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a

CD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed

while the compact disc is played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT →1 DISC RPT→1 TRACK RPT

→ALL DISC RDM →1 DISC RDM →ALL DISC

RPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will

be repeated.

1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing

will be repeated

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be

played randomly

1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-

rently playing will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

●Press the button, then press the slot

number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The

compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-

ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded

disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not

removed within 15 seconds, the disc will

reload.

All discs:

●Press and hold the button for more

than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be

ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed

within 20 seconds or the button is

pressed again during the eject sequence,

the entire disc eject sequence will be can-

celed.

When this button is pressed while a compact

disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs

have been loaded into the changer in CD mode

only.

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s

1is located above the power

outlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a por-

table cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

WHA1168

4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch

2. Phone operation switch

3. POWER on and MODE select switch

4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON

position, push the MODE switch to turn the audio

system on.

LHA0049 LHA1087

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the

modes:

PRESET A →PRESET B →PRESET C →CD*

→AUX** →PRESET A

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatible

auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less

than 1.5 seconds to change to the next or previ-

ous preset.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for

more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-

ous radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for less

than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present track or skip to the next track. Push

several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or for

more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing

disc up or down.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-

wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification

using a suitable tool such as an open-end

wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification

is 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 – 32 in-lb). Do not use pliers

to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on

the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be

hand tightened to the proper specification.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rod

during installation or the antenna rod may

break during vehicle operation.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-

phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route the

antenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

●Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage con-

trol system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion later in this manual.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible BluetoothTenabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With BluetoothTwireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is automati-

cally connected with the in-vehicle phone module

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position with the previously connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different BluetoothT

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●Some BluetoothTenabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and pairing.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

WHA1360

4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the BluetoothTwireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●If the hands-free phone system seems to be

malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”

later in this section. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTHtis a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the BluetoothTPhone

System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-

sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

●In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel.

●To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

press the button and after the tone

say, “Call Redial.”

NOTE:

The combined command of Call and (a

Name) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following rules and examples.

●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

●Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred”

●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continue en-

tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-

able when using the “Special Dialing” com-

mand and the “Send” command during a

call).

●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Dialing” command).

●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available

only when storing a phone book number).

●You can say “star” for “*” and “pound”for “#”

at any time in any position of the phone

number (available only when using “Special

Dialing” command).

See “List of voice commands” and “Special

Dialing” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please use the “Help” command to get

information on how to use the system.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VR

session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to

interrupt the system feedback and give

a command at once. See “List of voice

commands” and “During a call” in this

section for more information.

LHA1086

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition system is

active, press and hold the button

for 5 seconds to quit the voice recogni-

tion system at any time.

TUNING SWITCH

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the phone

system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-

ditional command options, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the BluetoothTHands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-

tion.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the lan-

guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in

French). To select the current language,

press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To

select a different language, tilt the tuning

switch ( or ) up or down.

NOTE:

You must press the button within 5

seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will

not be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performed

when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle

starts moving during the procedure, the

procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” s

“Add phone” s

Initiate from handset s

Name phone s

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the available

commands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” s

A. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” s

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

pairing from the phone handset s

4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone

model. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-

lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone s

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and

the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

Main Menu

“Call” s

“Phone Number” s

Speak the digits s

“Dial” s

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” s

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10

digits or any special characters.

3. Say “Phone Number” s

B. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format s

C.Ifthe

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five

five five” as the 1st group, then “one two

one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

10 digits or any special characters, say

“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-

bers” in this section for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and an-

nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” s

D. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button

on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the com-

mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear

the list of commands currently available any time

the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,

you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) s

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) s

“Special Number” s

“Redial” s

“Call Back” s

(Speak Name) s

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you

can dial a number associated with a name and

location.

See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to

store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry you wish to call. The system

acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with the

name, the system asks you to choose the loca-

tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,

the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) s

When prompted by the system, say the number

you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”

and “Making a call by entering a phone number”

in this section for more details.

“Special Number” s

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special

characters, say “Special Number”. When the

system acknowledges the command, the system

will prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” s

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Call back” s

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of

the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

If a call back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back”and

ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Press the button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-

mands.

●“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

●“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

●“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during

a call. For example, if you were directed to

dial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-

sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,

Say “pound” for “#”.

●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular

phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth Hands-Free System, press

the button.

●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” s

“Delete Entry” s

“List Names” s

For phones that do not support automatic down-

load of the phonebook (PBAP BluetoothTpro-

file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-

ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each

phone paired with the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

“Transfer entry” s

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

See “How to say numbers” in this section for

more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the BluetoothTcommunication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” s

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List names” s

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“List Names” s

“Transfer Entry” s

“Delete Entry” s

“Record Name” s

For phones that support automatic download of the

phonebook (PBAP BluetoothTprofile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries

to the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of

an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for

each phone paired with the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the BluetoothTsystem and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For more information see

“Record Name” in this section.

4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List names” s

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the

“Record Name” command in this section for in-

formation about recording custom voice tags for

list entries that the system has difficulty pro-

nouncing.

“Transfer entry” s

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

See “How to say numbers” in this section for

more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the BluetoothTcommunication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” s

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“Record name” s

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that the

vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can

also be used to record voice tags to directly dial

an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice

tags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” s

“Incoming” s

“Missed” s

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-

going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” s

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” s

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” s

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to

the vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” s

“Select Phone” s

“Delete Phone” s

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” s

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable

the BluetoothTfunction on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” s

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. See “Pairing procedure” in this sec-

tion for more information.

“Select Phone” s

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” s

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also

delete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” s

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent

a wireless connection to your phone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-

dialect users to train the system to improve rec-

ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model of

their own voice that is stored in the system. The

system is capable of storing a different speaker

adaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-

ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-

sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-

guage, see “Choosing a language” in this

section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker ad-

aptation has been completed and the sys-

tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

●The button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

●The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs the

trainer to say the following phrases. (The system

will prompt you for each phrase.)

●phonebook transfer entry

●dial three oh four two nine

●delete call back number

●incoming

●transfer entry

●eight pause nine three two pause seven

●delete all entries

●call seven two four zero nine

●phonebook delete entry

●next entry

●dial star two one seven oh

●yes

●no

●select

●missed

●dial eight five six nine two

●Bluetooth on

●outgoing

●call three one nine oh two

●nine seven pause pause three oh eight

●cancel

●call back number

●call star two zero nine five

●delete phone

●dial eight three zero five one

●record name

●four three pause two nine pause zero

●delete redial number

●phonebook list names

●call eight oh five four one

●correction

●connect phone

●dial seven four oh one eight

●previous entry

●delete

●dial nine seven two six six

●call seven six three oh one

●go back

●call five six two eight zero

●dial six six four three seven

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. The manual control mode does not

allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-

cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,

exit the manual control mode by pressing and

holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that

time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

●To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

speak 9Showing Manual Options9when

manual controls are initially activated.

●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

always speak the current menu option. De-

pending on the audio display, it will also

show the current menu option.

●To select the current menu option, press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button.

●To go back to the previous menu, press the

PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current

menu is the Main Menu, pressing the

PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the

Phone system.

●To exit the manual control mode, press and

hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5

seconds.

4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-

prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-5

Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-6

Off-road recovery...............................5-6

Rapid air pressure loss..........................5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-7

Driving safety precautions .......................5-7

Ignition switch.....................................5-9

Automatic transmission (if so equipped)..........5-10

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-11

Key positions .................................5-11

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ...............................5-11

Before starting the engine .........................5-12

Starting the engine ...............................5-12

Driving the vehicle ................................5-13

Automatic transmission (if so equipped)..........5-13

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-17

Parking brake ....................................5-19

Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-20

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-20

Cruise control operations.......................5-20

Break-in schedule ................................5-21

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-22

Using four wheel drive (4WD) .............5-22

Transfer case shifting procedures ...............5-23

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-30

Parking/parking on hills............................5-31

Power steering ...................................5-32

Brake system ....................................5-32

Brake precautions .............................5-32

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-33

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-34

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-34

Hill descent control system (if so equipped) .........5-36

Hill start assist system (if so equipped)..............5-37

Cold weather driving..............................5-37

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-37

Anti-freeze....................................5-37

Battery .......................................5-37

Draining of coolant water .......................5-38

Tire equipment ................................5-38

Special winter equipment.......................5-38

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-38

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-39

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the lift gate and rear windows

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

the lift gate or rear windows open, fol-

low these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan

control dial to 4 (high) to circulate

the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the lift gate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

●If a special body, camper, or other

equipment is added for recreational or

other usage, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not

occupy these areas while the engine is

running even if the vehicle is parked.

Some recreational vehicle appliances

such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters,

etc. may also generate carbon

monoxide.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

all 4 tires to the proper pressure. Driving on a

significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-

inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

Starting and driving 5-3

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h). Also, this system may not detect a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

of all 4 tires are adjusted. After the tires are

inflated to the recommended pressure, the

vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and

turn off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

5-4 Starting and driving

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in a

variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.

This gives them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allowing

you to anticipate problems. However, they are not

designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at

all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautions

later in this section.

Starting and driving 5-5

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, loss of control could result in a

collision with other vehicles or objects or

cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as

outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions

and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

or improperly belted person is significantly

more likely to be injured or killed than a

person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and

tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air

pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain

control of the vehicle by following the procedure

below. Please note that this procedure is only a

general guide. The vehicle must be driven as

appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-

hicle, road and traffic.

5-6 Starting and driving

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “Changing a flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-

scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-

hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are less

capable than four-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

Starting and driving 5-7

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never

back down in N (Neutral) or with the

clutch depressed (manual transmission

vehicles), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed. Use the hill

descent control feature (if so

equipped).

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo

area as far forward and as low as pos-

sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this manual.

This could cause your vehicle to roll

over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

5-8 Starting and driving

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle

has a higher center of gravity than a

passenger car. The vehicle is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as passenger cars. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly could re-

sult in loss of control and/or a rollover

accident.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the rear

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. See

“Brake system” later in this section for

“Wet brakes”.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. See “Periodic mainte-

nance” in the “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide.”

WARNING

●Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK position

while driving. The steering wheel will

lock (for models with a steering lock

mechanism). This may cause the driver

to lose control of the vehicle and could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so the ignition

switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position

and the key removed until the shift selector is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition, make

sure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)

position, the ignition switch cannot be moved to

the LOCK position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-

tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

2. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)

position after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot

be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as

follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON

position.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved

out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF

position or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.

When the ignition is in the OFF position,

the steering wheel is not locked (for mod-

els with a steering lock mechanism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-

tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or

right while turning the key to unlock the

key cylinder.

WSD0041

5-10 Starting and driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-

ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-

tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or

ON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, push the key in, then place the ignition

switch in LOCK position.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

WSD0052

Starting and driving 5-11

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Check that all doors are closed.

●Position seat and adjust head restraint and

headrests (if so equipped).

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON s

position. See “Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any of

the other gear positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position or

if the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift selector is in any of the driving

positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-

press the clutch pedal to the floor while

cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the clutch pedal is fully de-

pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by placing the ignition

switch in the START position. Release the

key when the engine starts. If the engine

starts, but fails to run, repeat the above

procedure.

●

If the engine is very hard to start in extremely

cold weather or when restarting, depress

the accelerator pedal a little (approximately

1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank

the engine. Release the key and the accel-

erator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by plac-

ing the ignition in the START position.

Release the key when the engine starts. If

the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, otherwise

the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-12 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could

cause an accident.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled to produce maximum

power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

selector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so

the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

To move the shift selector:

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift selector out of the P

(Park) position.

LSD0151

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-13

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-

tor is in any position while the engine is

not running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal injury

or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC

position for any reason while the vehicle is in N

(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition

switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position

and the key cannot be removed from the ignition

switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)

position, then the ignition switch can be placed in

LOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when

the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed to

move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or

any drive position to P (Park). Apply the

parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the

parking brake first, then move the shift selector

into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when

the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the shift

selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any

drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down long

slopes where engine braking would be advanta-

geous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 3 position.

2WD:

99 MPH (160 km/h)

4H:

99 MPH (160 km/h)

4LO:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-

ing on downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 2 position.

2WD:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

21 MPH (35 km/h)

5-14 Starting and driving

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,

or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 1 position.

2WD:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4H:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4LO:

12 MPH (20 km/h)

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may

not be moved from the P (Park) position even with

the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.

The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).

However, the steering wheel will be locked un-

less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery

is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift lock

release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

to unlock the steering wheel (for models with

a steering lock mechanism).

7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-

sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-

matic transmission system as soon as possible.

LSD0141

Starting and driving 5-15

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is depressed,

the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-

ing stop lights could cause an accident

injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed. Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-

sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and the

shift selector in the D (Drive)

position, the transmission upshifts

into Overdrive as vehicle speed

increases.

Overdrive does not engage until the engine

has reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down long

slopes where engine braking is nec-

essary push the Overdrive switch

once. The O/D OFF indicator light

in the instrument panel comes on at

this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a

gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift

shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of

Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the

Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The

O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel

comes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress the

Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-

tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.

This reduces fuel economy.

LSD0142

5-16 Starting and driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-

ing to a lower gear. This may cause a

loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may cause clutch

damage.

●Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

●Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

●When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into

the appropriate gear, then release the clutch

slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the

clutch pedal before operating the shift selector. If

the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the

transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard.

Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to

vehicle speed.

To back up depress the shift selector and then

move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping

the vehicle completely.

On the 5-speed manual transmission model, you

cannot shift directly from the 5th gear into R

(Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then in to R

(Reverse) after stopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R

(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), then

release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch

pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First).

5 - speed

WSD0154

6 - speed

LSD0148

Starting and driving 5-17

If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see

“Transfer case shifting procedures” later in this

section.

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

●For QR25DE two-wheel drive models:

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 11 (17)

2nd to 3rd 15 (24)

3rd to 4th 24 (38)

4th to 5th 35 (56)

●For VQ40DE two-wheel drive models and

four-wheel drive models (2H and 4H posi-

tion):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 11 (17)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 32 (51)

5th to 6th 45 (72)

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will en-

sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Allowable maximum speed in each gear:

2–wheel drive models (QR25DE engine)

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 34 (54)

2nd 58 (94)

3rd 89 (144)

4th —

5th —

2–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 35 (56)

2nd 60 (97)

3rd 87 (141)

4th —

5th —

4–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)

2H/4H position

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 33 (54)

2nd 58 (93)

3rd 84 (135)

4th —

5th —

6th —

4L position

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 12 (20)

2nd 22 (35)

3rd 32 (51)

4th 43 (70)

5th 55 (89)

6th —

5-18 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift selector in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up s

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)

position.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button s

Band lower the

lever completely .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

LSD0150

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. ON/OFF switch

4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator

light in the instrument panel then blinks to

warn the driver.

●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control main switch off and have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control main switch is turned ON

while pushing the ACCEL/RES,

COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located

on the steering wheel). To properly set the

cruise control system, use the following pro-

cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depressing

the clutch pedal when the cruise control is

set. Should this occur, depress the clutch

pedal and turn the main switch off imme-

diately. Failure to do so may cause engine

damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main

switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The SET indicator light in the

instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

WSD0153

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-20 Starting and driving

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator

light in the instrument panel goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light

goes out.

●Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator light and SET indicator light in the

instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET

switch. The preset speed is deleted from

memory.

●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission), or move the shift selector to N

(Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and en-

sure the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle. Failure to follow these

recommendations may result in short-

ened engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

Starting and driving 5-21

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

●Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high

gear as soon as possible.

●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

●For vehicles equipped with , use 4H

or 4L position only when necessary. Four-

wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

WARNING

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

(4WD)

5-22 Starting and driving

CAUTION

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when

you are driving on dry hard surface

roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for automatic

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift selector to

the N position with the brake pedal

depressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-

mission vehicles, stop the vehicle

and shift the shift selector to the N

position with the clutch pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING

PROCEDURES

The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions

(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the

desired drive mode according to the driving con-

ditions.

Starting and driving 5-23

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift

Switch Position Wheels Driven Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved

roads (Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> 4H

4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position en-

gaged.

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy

or snow-covered roads

Neutral

May blink

Neutral disengages the

automatic transmission

mechanical parking lock,

which will allow the vehicle

to roll. Do not leave the

transfer shift position in

Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. For automatic transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector

to the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed.

For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to

the (N) position with the clutch depressed.

3. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the

4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the

4WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal depressed.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H

AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST

STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL

AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL FOR AU-

TOMATIC TRANSMISSION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANS-

MISSION VEHICLES YOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT SELEC-

TOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO

4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum

power and traction is re-

quired (for example: on

steep grades or rocky,

sandy, muddy roads)

*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed

and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,

not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch 9OFF9.

5-24 Starting and driving

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position. For manual

transmission vehicles, move the shift selector to Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the

4WD shift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator

lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will

also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” later in this section.

Starting and driving 5-25

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to

select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the

driving conditions. There are three types of drive

modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the

transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to

move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle

MUST be stationary, shift the shift selector

to Neutral (N), and for automatic transmis-

sion vehicles depress the brake pedal or

for manual transmission vehicles depress

the clutch pedal. The switch must be de-

pressed and turned when changing into or

out of 4LO.

WARNING

●When parking, apply the parking brake

before stopping the engine and make

sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is

on and the ATP warning light goes off.

Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-

edly move even if the automatic trans-

mission is in the P position.

●The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-

ing and remain illuminated or turn off

before shifting the transmission into

gear. If the shift selector is shifted from

the (N) position to any other gear when

the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the

vehicle may move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

●The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption and

higher oil temperatures, and could

damage drivetrain components.

Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is

not recommended

●The 4LO position provides maximum

power and traction. Avoid raising ve-

hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-

mum speed is approximately 31 MPH

(50 km/h).

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch when

making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on

steep downhill grades. Use the engine

brake and low automatic transmission

gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmis-

sion (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine

braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear

wheels spinning.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry

hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise and tire wear.

NISSAN recommends driving in the

2WD position under these conditions.

●The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-

bient temperatures and the transfer

4LO position indicator light may blink

even when the 4WD shift switch is

shifted. After driving for a while you can

change the 4WD transfer case between

4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●Drive carefully according to the road surface

conditions.

5-26 Starting and driving

When the vehicle is stuck,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential

(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the

switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and

apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.

●If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the

vehicle back and forth between reverse and

drive gears.

●If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place

stones or wooden blocks under the tires.

Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire

chains may be effective.

CAUTION

●Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

●Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

●Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on

driving conditions.

●If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the key switch is

turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi-

tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not

abnormal.

●When the vehicle is stopped after mak-

ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt

after the shift selector is shifted to N or

P. This occurs because the transfer

clutch is released and not because of a

malfunction.

CAUTION

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch when

making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while

driving on steep downhill grades. Use

the engine brake and low automatic

transmission gears (D1 or D2) or

manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd

gear) for engine braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

with the rear wheels spinning.

●Before placing the 4WD shift switch in

the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the

vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100

km/h). Failure to do so can damage the

4WD system.

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0145

Starting and driving 5-27

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the

odometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-

cator light will illuminate the position selected by

the 4WD shift switch.

●The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode to

the other. When the shifting is com-

pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light

will come on.

●If the 4WD warning light comes on, the

4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

If the 4WD shift indicator light indication

changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift

switch is shifted to the 4H position at low

ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode

may be being engaged due to malfunc-

tioning drive system. If the indicator does

not return to normal and the 4WD warning

light comes on, have the system checked

by the nearest NISSAN dealer.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinks

when:

Comes on There is a malfunc-

tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinks slowly The difference in

wheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

LSD0147

5-28 Starting and driving

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after

the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system

when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light

will either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD

shift indicator light goes out.

A large difference between the diameters of front

and rear wheels will make the warning light blink

slowly (about once per two seconds). Change

the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive

fast.

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on or blinks

slowly during operation, have your ve-

hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

●Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not

recommended when the 4WD warning

light turns on.

●When the warning light comes on, the

2WD mode may be engaged even if the

4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially

careful when driving. If corresponding

parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD

mode will not be engaged even if the

4WD shift switch is shifted.

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when

you are driving on dry hard surface

roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for automatic

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift selector to

the N position with the brake pedal

depressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-

mission vehicles, stop the vehicle

and shift the shift selector to the N

position with the clutch pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

●The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light blinking.

Starting and driving 5-29

The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-

tion and should only be used when a vehicle has

become or is becoming stuck. This system oper-

ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive

wheels together, allowing them to turn at the

same speed. The system is used when it is not

possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using

the 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles).

When added traction is required, activate the

E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See

“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls”

section. Once the system fully engages, the indi-

cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON.

When the system is activated, both rear wheels

will engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to

engage the system, and the system will only

engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).

Once the vehicle is free, the system should be

turned OFF and driving resumed.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled

and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock

system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light

illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

WARNING

●Never leave the E-Lock system ON

when driving on paved or hard-surfaced

roads. Turning the vehicle may result in

the rear wheels slipping and result in an

accident and personal injury. After us-

ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-

hicle, turn the system OFF.

●Use the E-Lock system only when free-

ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position

before using the E-Lock system. Never

use the E-Lock system on a slippery

road surface such as snow or ice sur-

face. Using the E-Lock system when

driving in these road conditions may

cause unexpected movement of the ve-

hicle during engine braking, accelerat-

ing or turning, which may result in an

accident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●After using the E-Lock system, turn the

switch OFF to prevent possible damage

to driveline components from extended

use.

●Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster

than 12 mph (20 km/h) when the system

is engaged. Doing so could damage

drivetrain components.

●Do not turn on the E-lock system while

the tires are spinning. Doing so could

damage drivetrain components.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

automatic transmission models or in an

appropriate gear for manual transmis-

sion models. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in an accident.

Make sure the shift selector has been

pushed as far forward as it can go and

cannot be moved without depressing

the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill grade,

place the shift selector in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: s

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-31

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, especially

in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

steering will not work. Steering will be

harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-32 Starting and driving

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from careless

or dangerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control during

braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-

ber that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-

sible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-

pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

Starting and driving 5-33

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are

close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies

and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is

similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

●ABLS is a form of traction control using

sensors from the Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) to transfer power from a slipping drive

wheel to a wheel with more traction. The

ABLS system applies braking to the slipping

wheel, which helps redirect power to an-

other wheel.

●On 4WD models the ABLS system operates

in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is

engaged, the ABLS system will operate for

both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the

ABLS system operates on the drive axle

only.

●The ABLS system is always ON unless the

system detects brake pad overheating. If

high brake pad temperature is detected, it

will turn OFF, but normal brake function will

continue. ABLS will function even when the

VDC system (if so equipped) is turned OFF.

WARNING

The ABLS system provides increased trac-

tion, but will not prevent accidents due to

abrupt steering operation or by careless

driving or dangerous driving practices.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces, and always drive

carefully.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses

various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-

hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the

system will control braking and engine output to

help keep the vehicle on its steered path.

●When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system is operating, the SLIP indicator in the

instrument panel blinks.

●If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO

the indicator light will come on and

the VDC system will be turned off. See

“Transfer case shifting procedures” earlier in

this section.

●If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. See

“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-

tion control system may be disabled and the

SLIP and indicator lights will not turn off

after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position. Perform the following proce-

dure to reset the system:

●Start the engine and set the steering wheel

in the straight forward position.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)

SYSTEM (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-34 Starting and driving

●Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph

(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.

●The VDC OFF indicator light should go off

indicating the traction control system is op-

erational.

●If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn-

ing the ignition off, you will need to restart

the reset procedure.

If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min-

utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi-

nated in the instrument panel, have the Vehicle

Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system off using the VDC OFF

switch, most VDC and Traction Control System

(TCS) functions will be turned off. The SLIP

indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The

ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from under the hood. This is not a mal-

function and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

designed to help improve driving stabil-

ity but does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

approved for your vehicle or are ex-

tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling performance, and the

VDC OFF indicator light may come on.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

system may not operate properly and

the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indi-

cator light may come on.

●If engine related parts such as muffler

are not standard equipment or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-

dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-

cator lights may illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the Vehicle Dynamic Control system

may not operate properly and the VDC

OFF indicator light may come on. Do

not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off

indicator light may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

Starting and driving 5-35

●If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system may not operate

properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-

trol off indicator light may come on.

●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

not a substitute for winter tires or tire

chains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep down hill grades.

Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the hill descent control sys-

tem and decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driving

on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep

downhill roads. Failure to control ve-

hicle speed may result in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and possible serious

injury or death.

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

The hill descent control system helps maintain

vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph

(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill

descent control is useful when engine braking

alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.

Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to

control vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the burden of

brake and accelerator operation.

●When additional braking is required on

steep downhill roads activate the hill de-

scent control system by pushing the switch

ON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the

“Instruments and controls” section.

●Once the system is activated the indicator

light will remain on in the instrument panel,

see “Hill descent control system on indicator

light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steep

downhill grades, the hill descent control switch

should be ON and the shift selector in 2 (Second

gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-36 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Be especially

careful when stopped on a hill on frozen

or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

●The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle

to roll backwards and may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

●The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill

under all load or road conditions. Al-

ways be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards in the time it takes the

driver to release the brake pedal and apply the

accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

●The shift selector is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

●The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2

seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill

start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shift

selector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level

road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so

equipped).

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so

equipped) COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-37

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please

consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability informa-

tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see

“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

5-38 Starting and driving

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-

riously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or

lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-39

MEMO

5-40 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

First aid kit (if so equipped) .........................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-3

Jump starting .....................................6-9

Push starting.....................................6-11

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-11

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).........6-14

The first aid kit is located in the under-seat stor-

age bins.

To access the first aid kit:

For King cab model, lift up the rear jump seat and

remove net to remove the first aid kit. Refer to

“Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system” section ear-

lier in the manual.

For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat

and remove the net to remove the first aid kit.

Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section earlier in the manual.

King cab model

LCE0108

Crew cab model

LCE0113

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the

vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the

TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-

vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds

above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer

to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-

ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse), or the automatic transmission

into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-

matic transmission into P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks s

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

For King Cab models:

The tool storage compartment is located be-

tween the two rear jump seats.

1. Turn the knob from the lock to the unlock

position and remove the lid from the tool

storage compartment.

2. Release the strap to remove the tool bag.

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the stor-

age location.

4. Remove the jack and jacking tools.

WCE0044 King Cab models

LCE0109

6-4 In case of emergency

For Crew Cab models:

The tools and tool case are located behind the

rear bench seat.

1. Fold the rear bench seat down. Refer to

“Folding the rear bench seat down” in the

“Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section earlier in this

manual.

2. Remove the jack s

1and jacking tools s

All models:

1. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the

square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form

a handle.

2. Find the oval-shaped opening under the

middle of the tailgate. Pass the T-shaped

end of the jack rod through the opening and

direct it toward the spare tire winch, located

directly above the spare tire.

King Cab models

LCE0110

Crew Cab models

LCE0111

In case of emergency 6-5

3. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into

the T-shaped opening of the spare tire

winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod

engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the

jack rod counterclockwise to lower the

spare tire.

4. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,

reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer

chain, and carefully slide the tire from under

the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-

ing plate on the wheel and then lift the

spare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

Always refer to the illustration for the correct

placement and jack-up points for your specific

vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

WCE0070

6-6 In case of emergency

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The

jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-

rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground. 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

tire clears the ground.

WCE0152 LCE0087

In case of emergency 6-7

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-

hicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

WCE0063

6-8 In case of emergency

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label located in

the driver’s door opening.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions un-

der the heading “Wheels and tires” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-

lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)

or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).

Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-

tems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (s

A,s

B,s

C,s

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (1) to positive

(1) and negative (2) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, turn the key off and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

WCE0066

6-10 In case of emergency

CAUTION

●Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

●Automatic transmission models cannot

be push-started or tow-started. At-

tempting to do so may cause transmis-

sion damage.

●For manual transmission models, never

try to start the vehicle by towing it.

When the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator

cap is removed, pressurized hot water

will spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift selector

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling

fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN

dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-

tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service

operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the following

precautions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

●Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the front wheels

raised always use towing dollies under

the rear wheels.

●When towing automatic or manual

transmission models with the front

wheels on the ground or on towing

dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by placing

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. This may damage the steering

lock mechanism (for models with a

steering lock mechanism).

●If you have to tow manual transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground (if you do not use towing dol-

lies) or four wheels on the ground:

●Always release the parking brake.

●Move the transmission shift selector

to the N (Neutral) position

●Observe the following restricted tow-

ing speeds and distances for manual

transmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (805

km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily be

greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing

to prevent damage to the transmission.

AAutomatic Transmissions (AT)

BManual Transmissions (MT)

WCE0197

In case of emergency 6-13

Four-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-

hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

transfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

CAUTION

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the main structural members of

the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so

equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body

will be damaged.

●Use the towing hook (if so equipped)

only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,

snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle

for a long distance using only the tow-

ing hook.

WCE0161 LCE0103

6-14 In case of emergency

●The towing hook is under tremendous

force when used to free a stuck vehicle.

Never pull the hook at an angle.

●Always pull the cable straight out from

the front or rear of the vehicle.

●Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the sus-

pension, steering, brake or cooling

systems.

●Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-

cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the re-

covery device manufacturer’s instructions.

Attach the tow strap to the towing hook (if so

equipped).

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System

(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (reverse)

and D (drive) (automatic transmission

models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)

(manual transmission models).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (automatic

transmission models) or 1st and R

(manual transmission models).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Floor mats .....................................7-4

Seat belts .....................................7-5

Corrosion protection...............................7-5

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-5

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain.

●after driving on coastal roads.

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface.

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electri-

cal conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-

tion of the air bag system and result in

serious personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-

tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor

mat brackets and one passenger’s side front floor

mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.

NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed

for your vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat

has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the

passenger’s side has one grommet hole. Position

each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook

through the floor mat grommet holes while cen-

tering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”

in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions...........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-6

Engine cooling system .............................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8

Changing engine coolant........................8-9

Engine oil.........................................8-9

Checking engine oil level ........................8-9

Changing engine oil ...........................8-11

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-12

5-speed automatic transmission fluid ...............8-13

Power steering fluid...............................8-13

Brake and clutch fluid .............................8-14

Brake fluid ....................................8-14

Clutch fluid ...................................8-14

Window washer fluid .............................8-15

Window washer fluid reservoir ..................8-15

Battery ..........................................8-15

Jump starting .................................8-17

Variable voltage control system.....................8-17

Drive belt ........................................8-18

Spark plugs......................................8-19

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-19

Air cleaner .......................................8-20

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) ..............8-20

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-22

Cleaning .....................................8-22

Replacing ....................................8-22

Brakes ..........................................8-23

Fuses ...........................................8-24

Engine compartment...........................8-24

Passenger compartment .......................8-25

Battery replacement ..............................8-26

Keyfob (if so equipped) ........................8-27

Lights ...........................................8-28

Headlights....................................8-28

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-30

Wheels and tires .................................8-32

Tire pressure..................................8-32

Tire labeling...................................8-36

Types of tires..................................8-38

Tire chains....................................8-39

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-39

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-

mum maintenance requirements with long ser-

vice intervals to save you both time and money.

However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s

good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-

sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following

items with an “*” is found later in this sec-

tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your

vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in

the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-

tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-

ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,

see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats

Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they op-

erate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every

position. Check that the head restraints and head-

rests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if

so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift selector to

P (Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion and the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before working

near the fan.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced by

a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines

are under high pressure even when the

engine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

QR25DE engine

1. Window washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/Fusible link box

3. Fuse and relay box

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Engine oil dipstick

7. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)

8. Drive belt location

9. Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0643

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

VQ40DE engine

1. Window washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/fusible link box

3. Fuse and relay box

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)

7. Air cleaner

8. Drive belt location

9. Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

LII0167

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-

freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze

solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.

Additional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. See precautions in “If your

vehicle overheats” found in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the

proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze

and 50% demineralized or distilled water.

The use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than a Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent may

damage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperature

down to

Genuine

NISSAN

Long Life

Antifreeze/

Coolant or

equivalent

Demineral-

ized or dis-

tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the

reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the

radiator when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and also add

it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-

ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten

it until a clicking sound is heard.

VQ40DE

LDI0436

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the engine

is hot. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

QR25DE

LDI0466

VQ40DE

WDI0672

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks s

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark s

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill s

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

QR25DE

LDI0467 LDI0371

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap s

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the drain plug s

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. See “Changing engine

oil filter” later in this section.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual for

drain and refill capacity.

VQ40DE

WDI0500

QR25DE

WDI0501

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-

posing the filter. (For VQ40DE engine only)

5. Loosen the oil filter s

Awith an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then

remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the sealing surface of the

engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

VQ40DE

WDI0502

QR25DE

WDI0503

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if

necessary.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

●Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not

available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

may also be used.

●Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-

tion in driveability and automatic trans-

mission durability, and may damage the

automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also

described on caution labels located in the engine

compartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir

at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -

80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the

power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-

tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-

ine NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill

through the opening.

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

For further brake and clutch fluid specification

information, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and clutch

systems. The use of improper fluids can

damage the brake system and affect

the vehicle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN

Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT

3fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added

frequently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir

(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is

below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid

up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification

information, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0463 LDI0463

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.

Add window washer fluid when the low window

washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window

washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of win-

dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-

gen gas generated by the battery is ex-

plosive. Explosive gases can cause

blindness or injury. Do not allow battery

fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics

or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

LDI0441

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall

the vent caps.

WDI0224

WDI0529

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor s

Ais located near the battery

along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-

trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to

ground them to a suitable body ground such as

the frame or engine block area.

LDI0454

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Automatic belt tensioner

3. Cooling fan

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Crankshaft pulley

6. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced

or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule found in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

1 Power steering fluid pump

2 Water pump

3 Air conditioner compressor

(if so equipped)

4 Crankshaft pulley

5 Generator

VQ40DE

WDI0639

QR25DE

LDI0461

DRIVE BELT

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs (if so

equipped)

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped s

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-

gapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if so

equipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped s

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-

ping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the

cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the VQ40DE air cleaner filter:

1Push down on the clips and remove the air

cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

To remove the QR25DE air cleaner filter:

1. Unlatch the clips s

A,s

B,s

2. Push down half of air cleaner to clear the

bottom retainers.

3. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove the air

cleaner filter

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so

equipped)

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. Refer to the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for

change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-

dure:

VQ40DE

WDI0686

QR25DE

LDI0465

AIR CLEANER

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Open the glove box and press in on the

sides so that it will open completely allowing

it to hang by the cord.

2. Lift upward to release the filter cover and

remove the filter cover. NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.

The end of the filter with the arrow should

face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows

should face downward.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide

it over to the right. Insert the second filter

into the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

LDI0442 LDI0676 LDI0473

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2Push the release tab, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove.

3Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position and

release it until it has made contact with the

windshield.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle s

A. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin s

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding

brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0595

BRAKES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Two types of fuses are used. Type s

Ais used in

the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type

Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,

the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI0444

FUSES

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open s

A, replace it with a new

fuse s

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

WDI0452 LDI0445

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

4. If the fuse is open s

A, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse s

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

Type A

WDI0452

Type B

LDI0456

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1Open the lid using a coin s

2Remove the battery s

3Install a new battery s

Cwith the “+” facing

down.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the

battery across the contact points will seri-

ously deplete the storage capacity.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and electric

terminals as it could cause a malfunction.

●When changing the battery, do not let dust

or oil get on the keyfob.

●There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-

tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

4Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then the

button two or three times to check the key-

fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

●The operational range of the keyfob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

LDI0484

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A

bulb can be replaced from inside the engine

compartment without removing the headlight as-

sembly.

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the head-

light reflector for a long period of time

as dust, moisture and smoke may enter

the headlight body and affect the per-

formance of the headlight.

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the

rear end of the bulb.

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-

wise until it is free from the headlight reflec-

tor and then remove it s

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not

shake or rotate the bulb when removing it

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

●Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-

tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb

plastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

LDI0446

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 T-20 NA

Side marker 3.8 194

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3156AK

Stop/Tail 27/8 3157K

Back-up 18 921

License plate light 5 2J6

Fog light*

(if so equipped) 55 H11

Map lights (if so equipped) 8 AL38

Room light 8 AL41

High-mounted stop light/cargo lights*

——

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

1. Map lights (if so equipped)

2. Room light

3. High-mount stoplight/cargo lights

4. License plate light

5. Rear combination light

6. Fog light (if so equipped)

7. Headlight assembly

LDI0713

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or

cover.

: Indicates bulb removal

: Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing.

WDI0306 Map lights/personal lights LDI0459

Room light

WDI0206

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light”in the “Instruments and

controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section.

Rear combination light

WDI0300

License plate light

WDI0411

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not load your ve-

hicle beyond this capacity. Over-

loading your vehicle may result in

reduced tire life, unsafe operat-

ing conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable han-

dling characteristics and could

also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified ca-

pacity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Tire and loading information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-

mation in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

3Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds. The recom-

mended cold tire inflation is set by the

manufacturer to provide the best bal-

ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,

driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the

vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later

in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped).

LDI0485

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the

Tire and Loading Information label (if

so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front Original Tire:

P235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:

P235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:

P235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

LDI0393

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

ture.

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing, then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,

and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

Example

WDI0396

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear

paved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section in this manual for tire re-

placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to acci-

dents and could result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect

the VDC system and/or interference

with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-

ference can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe

wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may dam-

age the transmission, transfer case and

differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full size

spare that is a different size or brand than the tires

originally installed on the vehicle. This full size

spare tire is intended for temporary use only and

should be replaced at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if the full size

temporary use only spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the spare tire is

installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt

braking while driving. The vehicle driv-

ing performance may be affected when

driving on wet or snow covered roads.

●When the temporary full size spare is

installed, the following systems may

not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

System.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the spare tire

inflated to the pressure specification

shown on the tire and loading informa-

tion label.

●With the spare tire installed do not drive

the vehicle at speeds faster than 50

MPH (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the temporary spare tire

should be used on the front wheels and

the original tire used on the rear

wheels. Use tire chains only on the drive

wheels.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a spare tire.

Tire chains will not fit properly and may

cause damage to the vehicle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

MEMO

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2

Fuel recommendation ...........................9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............................9-7

Specifications.....................................9-8

Engine ........................................9-8

Wheels and tires ...............................9-9

Dimensions and weights ........................9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ..................................9-10

Vehicle identification ..............................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .........9-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ..............................9-10

Engine serial number...........................9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-11

Emission control information label ...............9-12

Tire and loading information label................9-12

Air conditioner specification label................9-12

Installing front license plate ........................9-13

Installing front license plate with grommets .......9-13

Installing front license plate without

grommets ....................................9-13

Vehicle loading information ........................9-13

Terms ........................................9-13

Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-14

Securing the load..............................9-16

Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) ......9-17

Loading tips ..................................9-22

Truck-camper loading information ..................9-23

Crew Cab Models .............................9-23

King Cab models ..............................9-23

Special Body vehicles..........................9-23

Location for center of gravity....................9-23

Vehicle load weight capacity ....................9-24

Measurement of weights .......................9-24

Towing a trailer ...................................9-24

Maximum load limits ...........................9-25

Towing load/specification.......................9-28

Towing safety .................................9-29

Flat towing....................................9-35

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-36

Emission control system warranty ..................9-37

Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-37

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-37

Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-38

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-39

In the event of a collision .......................9-39

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 21 1/8gal 17-5/8 gal 80 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

Engine oil *7

Drain and Refill

With oil filter change

QR25DE

4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Without oil filter

change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3

With oil filter change

VQ40DE

5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Without oil filter

change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8

Cooling system

With reservoir

QR25DE 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal 9.4 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

VQ40DE 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.2

Manual transmission gear oil

5M/T 3 qt 2-1/2 qt 2.89 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi

75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85

6 M/T 4X2 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 3.98 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi

75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

6 M/T 4X4 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt 4.18

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-

tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *2

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent

DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease ———NLGINo.2(Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent *5

Transfer fluid 2-1/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *6

Front final drive oil 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt 0.85 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API

GL-5 SAE 80W-90

Rear final drive oil (except 6 speed MT and O/R vehicles) 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt 1.6 Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 syn-

thetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 *7

Rear final drive oil 6 speed MT and O/R vehicles only 4-1/4 pt 3-1/2 pt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-140 or API GL-5 syn-

thetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140 *8

Windshield washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”

*2: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or

Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new ve-

hicle limited warranty.

*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used.

*4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”

*6: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”

*8: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

CAUTION

●Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle

not specifically designed for E-85 fuel

can damage fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

●E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded

gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. See “Capacities

and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this

section. NISSAN recommends the use of an

energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel

economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-

placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

WTI0183

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN

A/C system oil Type R or the exact equiva-

lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ40DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 151.82 (2,488) 241.30 (3,954)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

M/T

A/T (in “N” position) See the “Emission Control Information label” on the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug Standard PLZKAR6A-11 DILFR5A11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

15 x 7.0J

16 x 7.0J

18 x 7.5J

Tires

P235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

Short wheel base in (mm) 205.5(5220)

Long wheel base in (mm) 219.4(5574)

Overall width in (mm) 72.8(1850)

Overall height

With roof rack in (mm) 74.0(1880)

Without roof rack

XE and SE King cab

models

SE, LE, Pro-4X King cab

models

Crew cab models

in (mm) 68.7(1745)

69.7(1770)

70.1(1780)

Front Track in (mm) 61.8(1570)

Rear Track in (mm) 61.8(1570)

Wheelbase

Short wheel base in (mm) 125.9(3200)

Long wheel base in (mm) 139.8(3550)

Gross vehicle weight

rating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label”

on the center pillar be-

tween the driver’s side

front and side doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review

it carefully.

QR25DE engine

LTI0130

VQ40DE engine

LTI0127 LTI0136

Technical and consumer information 9-11

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI0133 LTI0135 LTI0206

9-12 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE

PLATE WITH GROMMETS

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate with grommets:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a 0.37 in

(9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the

drill. Insert two plastic grommets provided.

Install the license plate holder using the two

bolts (and washers) provided.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-14

mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE

PLATE WITHOUT GROMMETS

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate without grommets:

1. Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher

at the location mark (small dimple) using a

0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the

threads behind the finisher, apply only light

pressure to the drill.

2. Mount the license plate bracket using two 8

mm slotted hex head screws.

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-13

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped).

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

Both the GVWR and GAWR are located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. See “Measurement of Weights”

later in this section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Capacity”

on the Tire and Loading Information label

(if so equipped).

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example LTI0152

Technical and consumer information 9-15

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

See “Measurement of Weights” later in

this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

SECURING THE LOAD

For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so

equipped) are placed at each corner of the truck

box. These may be used to help secure cargo

loaded into the truck box.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in

loss of control and cause personal

injury.

LTI0102

9-16 Technical and consumer information

1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Channel sections

4. Floor channels

UTILI-TRACK™ CHANNEL SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

WARNING

●Properly install and tighten the tie-

down cleats into the Utili-track™ chan-

nel system. Also, do not attach any rope

or straps directly to the channel. Failure

to properly install the tie-down cleats or

attaching ropes or straps directly to the

channel can cause the cargo to become

unsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

The Utili-track™ channel system allows you to

move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best

location to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed so the

clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail.

If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches,

it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be

properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the

cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 inch

pounds)

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat peri-

odically during a trip to make sure the center bolt

has not become loose.

Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly

store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

LTI0107

Technical and consumer information 9-17

3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicu-

lar to the channel as shown. Then rotate the

cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the de-

sired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom

fully seat into the channel detents.

LTI0103

LTI0104

9-18 Technical and consumer information

5. There should be no gap between the bottom

of the cleat and the top of the channel.

Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40

inch pounds).

WTI0124

Technical and consumer information 9-19

CAUTION

●Install only one cleat per section of

channel.

●Applying loads at angles to the cleats

greater then 45° or loads greater than

150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or

200 lbs. (side channels) may cause

damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106

9-20 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gap

between the front and rear side channels.

Doing this could affect the rear structure

in certain rear impacts, which could result

in serious injury.

CAUTION

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Use the channel end stoppers to help se-

cure items in the channels from sliding off

the end of the truck bed.

Channel end stoppers (if so equipped)

The channel end stoppers should be used to help

prevent accessories installed in the channels

from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck

bed.

They must be installed so they are properly

seated in the detents in the channel.

1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI0123 WTI0119

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Install the channels end stoppers as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly

store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench and insert

it into the channel.

3. Position the end stopper to the desired lo-

cation on the channel so the nubs on the

bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the

channel detents.

4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could oc-

cur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

CREW CAB MODELS

Crew Cab short wheel base models should

not be used to carry a slide-in camper.

KING CAB MODELS

This information is provided for you to properly

install a slide-in camper and is based on the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

regulations. It is recommended that, before in-

stalling the camper, you carefully read the follow-

ing information and ensure that the camper

meets the specifications.

This information may not apply to some Canada

model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES

Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or

camper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manual

does not cover these options. For further infor-

mation, please refer to the body manufacturer’s

instruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF

GRAVITY

The illustration indicates the recommended

cargo center of gravity location.

King Cab:

L1 = 1054 mm (41.5 in)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If a

load is too far back, it can affect handling

characteristics. If a load is too far forward,

the front axle may be overloaded.

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,

the total cargo load of the truck consists of the

camper manufacturer’s weight figure, plus:

●the weight of installed additional camper

equipment not included in the camper

manufacturer’s weight figure,

●the weight of camper cargo,

●and the weight of occupants in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the

truck’s pay load weight rating and the camper’s

center of gravity should fall within the truck’s

recommended center of gravity location when

installed.

LTI0128 LTI0129

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING

INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-23

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance and may lead to

accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label, see “Tire

and Loading Information label” in this section,

indicates the maximum total weight of passen-

gers, optional equipment (air conditioning, trailer

hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is designed

to carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you

do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. See ’’Vehicle Loading

Information’’ earlier in this section for details.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.

See the Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

TOWING A TRAILER

9-24 Technical and consumer information

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight

plus its cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified

in the following “Towing Load/Specification”

chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. See “If your

vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

LTI0161

Technical and consumer information 9-25

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-

uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -

15 percent of the total trailer load or use the

trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-

facturer. The tongue load must be within the

maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-

ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the

tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a

base vehicle with driver and any options required

to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and

reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

WTI0160 CA0036

9-26 Technical and consumer information

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

9Towing Load/Specification9chart found

later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale- including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 5,185 lb. (2352 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

5,815 lb. (2638 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification9chart -

11,133 lb. (5050 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification9chart - 6,100 lb.

(2767 kg).

5,815 lb. (2638 kg) GVWR

– 5,185 lb. (2352 kg) GVW

= 630 lb. (286 kg) Available for tongue

weight

11,133 lb. (5050 kg) GCWR

– 5,185 lb. (2352 kg) GVW

= 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) Capacity available for

towing

630 lb. (286 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to

match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal area

specification may exceed the towing capac-

ity of the vehicle. This may affect the towing

performance and lead to vehicle damage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a

trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the

vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-

tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum

trailer frontal area specification shown in the

9Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontal

area can be determined by multiplying the width

of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For

example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall

has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

Technical and consumer information 9-27

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

King Cab 2WD (4 cyl) King Cab 2WD (6 cyl) King Cab 4WD (6 cyl) Crew Cab 2WD Crew Cab 4WD

Maximum Towing Capacity*1, *2, *3 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg) 6,500 lb. (2,949 kg) 6,300 lb. (2,858 kg) 6,300 lb. (2,858 kg) 6,100 lb. (2,767 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 350 lb. (158 kg) 650 lb. (295 kg) 630 lb. (285 kg) 630 lb. (285 kg) 610 lb. (276 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating 7,936 lb. (3,600 kg) 11,133 lb. (5,050 kg) 11,133 lb. (5,050 kg) 11,133 lb. (5,050 kg) 11,133 lb. (5,050 kg)

Maximum trailer frontal area 60 sq feet (5.52 sq meters)

*1:

●The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

●All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above

3,000 lb (1,361 kg).

*2: The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg) and 350 lb. (158 kg) tongue load.

*3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available

from your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer

hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make

sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property

damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,

rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Technical and consumer information 9-29

Bumper towing

The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi-

sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed

to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb

(1,588 kg).

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the

center of the step bumper s

A, then remove it to

install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-

hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue weight

transferred through the frame and pushing down

on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is

recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a

maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. Check with the

trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to

determine if they recommend the use of a weight-

distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-

fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If

you are considering use of a weight-

distributing hitch system with a surge

brake-equipped trailer, check with the

surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer

to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-

turer for installing and using the weight-

distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper

height is within0-.5inches (0 – 13 mm) of

the reference height measured in step 2. The

rear bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If the

rear bumper is higher than the measured

reference height when loaded, the vehicle

may handle unpredictably which could

cause a loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

LTI0132

9-30 Technical and consumer information

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered

a Class II ball mount.

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A

weight distributing hitch should be used to tow

trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb

(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-

hicle is only capable of towing the maximum

trailer weights shown in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

●

Special hitches which include frame rein-

forcements are required for towing above

2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genuine

NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and hitch

balls for pickup trucks and sport utility

vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer.

●The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

●To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

●Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety

chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch

ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

Technical and consumer information 9-31

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a module/converter

that exceeds these power requirements

may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-

tain the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the

optional trailer tow package are equipped with a

7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat 4–pin har-

ness is available from your dealer for vehicles

without a tow package. If your trailer is equipped

with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be

needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.

Adapters are available at auto parts stores and

hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer harness

connector are pre-wired for a trailer brake con-

troller. See a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake

adapter harness.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most states

require a separate braking system on trailers with

a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make

sure the trailer meets the local regulations and

the regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line

running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are

activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch

ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic

surge brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is

no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-

eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-

tems are activated by an electronic signal sent

from a trailer brake controller (special brake-

sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are

used, see 9Electric trailer brake controller9in this

section.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-

ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly

installed and demonstrate proper brake function

testing.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-

quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer

brake controller.

A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is available

that is specifically designed to be used when

installing an aftermarket brake controller.

Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake con-

troller according to the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

9-32 Technical and consumer information

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●

Determine the overall height of the vehicle and

trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-

ently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is in

4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If

the indicator light is flashing, or the

ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission

is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch

to 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmission

park warning light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section and “Using four wheel

drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”

section.

7. Turn off the engine.

Technical and consumer information 9-33

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Downshift the transmission to a lower gear

for engine braking when driving down steep

or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-

trol not be used while towing a trailer.

9-34 Technical and consumer information

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, see the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Automatic Transmission (if so

equipped)

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)

●Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

●On four-wheel drive vehicles, place the

transfer case in the 2H range. Failure to do

so will cause the powertrain to bind up.

●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-

tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine

after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing

may cause damage to internal transmission

parts.

Technical and consumer information 9-35

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-36 Technical and consumer information

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is

“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20

seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the

MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-

dition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If

you cannot or do not want to perform the driving

pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Technical and consumer information 9-37

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic con-

ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant

temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-

low the engine to idle until the gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal oper-

ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and keep it released for at

least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-

utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in

the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps1-8atleast one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-

able between steps. Do not stop the engine until

step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

9-38 Technical and consumer information

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-

cedures, this manual is the same one used by the

factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN

dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN

Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service

and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later contact:

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area

call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-

tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-39

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN

collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts

made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-

tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its

resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-

tection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-

necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the

end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to

minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the

windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-

genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such

built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-

ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws

that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-

ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during

the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-

tect you, so you can take action to protect your-

self.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

9-40 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

4WD warning light ...............2-16

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system

(if so equipped) .................5-34

Air bag (See supplemental restraint system)

. .1-57

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-65

Air bag warning labels .............1-71

Air bag warning light...........1-72, 2-18

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-20

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation .......4-6, 4-12

Air conditioner service ...........4-17

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .............9-7

Heater and air conditioner

controls ................4-2, 4-10

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-17

Air flow charts ...............4-7, 4-14

Alarm system (See vehicle security system)

. .2-23

Anchor point locations .............1-30

Antenna .....................4-36

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-14

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-33

Audible reminders ...............2-22

Audio system ..................4-17

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-30, 4-33

Compact disc (CD) player .........4-27

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

changer ...................4-30

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player ....................4-25

Radio ....................4-17

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-35

Autolight switch.................2-27

Automatic

Automatic power window switch .....2-47

Automatic transmission position indicator

light .....................2-18

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-14

Automatic door locks ..............3-5

AUX jack ....................4-34

Battery......................8-15

Charge warning light ............2-15

Before starting the engine ...........5-12

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-18

Block heater

Engine ....................5-39

BluetoothThands-free phone system .....4-37

Booster seats ..................1-52

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-33

Brake fluid..................8-14

Brake light (See stop light).........8-30

Brake system ................5-32

Brake warning light .............2-15

Brake wear indicators ........2-22, 8-23

Parking brake operation ..........5-19

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-23

Brakes ......................8-23

Break-in schedule ...............5-21

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-29

Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-14

Bulb replacement ................8-30

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...................9-2

Car phone or CB radio.............4-36

Cargo light switch ...............2-31

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13

CD care and cleaning .............4-35

CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-30, 4-33

CD player (See audio system) .........4-27

Child restraint with top tether strap ......1-30

Child restraints.......1-24, 1-25, 1-26, 1-28

Precautions on child

restraints ........1-26, 1-33, 1-42, 1-52

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30

Child safety rear door lock............3-6

Chimes, audible reminders...........2-22

Cleaning exterior and interior ..........7-2

Clock ......................4-26

Clutch

Clutch fluid .................8-14

Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch .....2-35

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-11

Cold weather driving ..............5-37

Compact disc (CD) player ...........4-27

Compass display .................2-9

Console box ...................2-39

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).......4-35

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-2, 4-10

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-9

Checking engine coolant level ........8-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Corrosion protection ...............7-5

Cruise control ..................5-20

Cup holders ...................2-42

Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-69

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-29

Defroster switch

Rear window defroster switch .......2-26

Dimensions and weights .............9-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-29

Door locks .....................3-3

Door open warning light.............2-15

Drive belt .....................8-18

Driving

Cold weather driving ............5-37

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13

Driving with manual transmission ......5-17

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Economy - fuel ..................5-22

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system ......................5-30

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ..................2-34

Emission control information label .......9-12

Emission control system warranty .......9-37

Engine

Before starting the engine..........5-12

Block heater .................5-39

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-9

Changing engine oil .............8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine coolant level ........8-8

Checking engine oil level ...........8-9

Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Engine cooling system ............8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-15

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6

Engine serial number ............9-11

Engine specifications .............9-8

Starting the engine .............5-12

Engine oil pressure gauge ............2-8

Event data recorders ..............9-38

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2

First aid kit .....................6-2

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) ......2-30

Flat tire .......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-14

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Clutch fluid ..................8-14

Engine coolant.................8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

Power steering fluid .............8-13

Window washer fluid ............8-15

F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-11

Fog light switch .................2-30

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-65

Front seats.....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-22

Fuel gauge ...................2-7

Fuel octane rating ...............9-5

Fuel recommendation .............9-4

Fuel-filler cap.................3-10

Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-10

Fuel-filler lid .................3-10

Fuses .......................8-24

Fusible links ...................8-25

10-2

Garage door opener, HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver ....................2-51

Gascap..................3-10, 3-10

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ..........2-8

Fuel gauge ...................2-7

Odometer ...................2-4

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-6

Trip computer .................2-5

Trip odometer .................2-4

Voltmeter....................2-8

General maintenance ...............8-2

Glove box.....................2-40

Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT.....4-37

Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-30

Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-26

Headlight control switch ............2-26

Headlights ....................8-28

Heated seats ...................2-32

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-2, 4-10

Heater operation ............4-4, 4-11

Hill descent control switch ...........2-33

Hill descent control system ...........5-36

Hill start assist system..............5-37

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver........2-51

Hood release...................3-10

Horn .......................2-31

Ignition switch ...................5-9

Immobilizer system .........2-24, 3-2, 5-11

Important vehicle information label .......9-11

In-cabin microfilter ................8-20

Increasing fuel economy.............5-22

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) ....................2-13

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror........3-14

Inside mirror ...................3-13

Instrument brightness control ..........2-29

Instrument panel ...............0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-29

Interior light....................2-50

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-28

Jump seat .....................1-5

Jump starting ...................6-9

Key.........................3-2

Keyfob battery replacement ...........8-26

Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry

system).......................3-6

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-11

Emission control information label .....9-12

Engine serial number ............9-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-11

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-71

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-28

License plate

Installing the license plate..........9-13

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-72, 2-18

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-30

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-14

Bulb replacement ..............8-30

Charge warning light ............2-15

Fog light switch ...............2-30

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-26

Headlight control switch ..........2-26

Headlights ..................8-28

Interior light..................2-50

Light bulbs ..................8-28

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-16

Low washer fluid warning light .......2-18

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-66

Security indicator light............2-20

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders...................2-13

Lights

Map lights ..................2-51

10-3

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Door locks ...................3-3

Power door locks ...............3-4

Low fuel warning light ..............2-16

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-16

Low washer fluid warning light .........2-18

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ..........2-44

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13

Maintenance

General maintenance .............8-2

Inside the vehicle ...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Outside the vehicle ..............8-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-24

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Malfunction indicator light ............2-20

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-2

Manual windows .................2-47

Map lights ....................2-51

Map pocket....................2-41

Meters and gauges ................2-3

Instrument brightness control ........2-29

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......3-14

Inside mirror .................3-13

Outside mirrors ...............3-14

Vanity mirror .................3-13

Moonroof .....................2-48

Multi-remote control system

(See remote keyless entry system)........3-6

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system ................2-24, 3-2, 5-11

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-5

Odometer .....................2-4

Oil Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine oil .............8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine oil level ...........8-9

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6

Outside mirrors .................3-14

Overdrive switch .................5-16

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats...........6-11

Owner’s manual order form ...........9-39

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ....................9-39

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-19

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-31

Phone, BluetoothThands-free system .....4-37

Power

Front seat adjustment .............1-4

Power door locks ...............3-4

Power outlet .................2-35

Power steering fluid .............8-13

Power steering system ...........5-32

Power windows ...............2-45

Rear power windows ............2-47

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-5

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-26, 1-33, 1-42, 1-52

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-16

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-57

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system .........1-70

Push starting ...................6-11

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-36

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-30, 4-33

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

changer....................4-30

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-25

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-35

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test ........................9-37

Rear power windows ..............2-47

Rear sliding window ...............2-48

Rear window defroster switch .........2-26

10-4

Recorders

Event data ..................9-38

Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-7

Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10

Remote keyless entry system...........3-6

Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-37

Roof rack .....................2-44

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Child seat belts .....1-26, 1-33, 1-42, 1-52

Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-37

Seat

Jump seat ...................1-5

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2

Front power seat adjustment .........1-4

Seat belt

Child safety..................1-24

Infants and small children ..........1-25

Injured Person ................1-19

Larger children ................1-25

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-16

Pregnant women...............1-19

Pre-tensioner seat belt system .......1-70

Seat belt extenders .............1-23

Seat belt maintenance............1-24

Seat belts...................1-16

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-23

Three-point type with retractor .......1-19

Seat belt warning light..............2-18

Seatback pockets ................2-42

Seats

Adjustment...................1-2

Front seats...................1-2

Heated seats .................2-32

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-2

Security indicator light..............2-20

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system), engine start ........2-24, 3-2, 5-11

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-23

Service manual order form ...........9-39

Servicing air conditioner.............4-17

Shift lock release.................5-15

Shifting

Automatic transmission ...........5-13

Manual transmission .............5-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-23

Side air bag system (See supplemental side air

bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-69

Spark plug replacement .............8-19

Speedometer ...................2-4

SRS warning label ................1-71

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-12

Jump starting .................6-9

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Push starting .................6-11

Starting the engine .............5-12

Steering

Power steering fluid .............8-13

Power steering system ...........5-32

Tilting steering wheel ............3-12

Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-35

Stop light .....................8-30

Storage ......................2-36

Storage tray ................2-36, 2-38

Sun visors ....................3-12

Sunglasses case.................2-40

Sunroof (see Moonroof) .............2-48

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-71

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-72, 2-18

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-65

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-71

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-57

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-57

Switch

Autolight switch ...............2-27

Automatic power window switch ......2-47

Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . .2-35

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ................2-34

Fog light switch ...............2-30

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-30

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-26

Headlight control switch ..........2-26

Hill descent control switch .........2-33

Ignition switch .................5-9

Overdrive switch ...............5-16

Power door lock switch ............3-4

Rear window defroster switch .......2-26

Turn signal switch ..............2-30

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-32

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-25

Tachometer ....................2-6

Tailgate latch ............3-15, 3-17, 3-18

10-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start .............2-24, 3-2, 5-11

Three-way catalyst ................5-3

Tie down hooks .................3-18

Tilting steering wheel ..............3-12

TireFlat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ................6-4, 8-42

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Tire chains ..................8-39

Tire placard..................9-12

Tire pressure .................8-32

Tire rotation..................8-39

Tires of 4-wheel drive ............8-41

Types of tires .................8-38

Uniform tire quality grading .........9-36

Wheels and tires...............8-32

Wheel/tire size.................9-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-16

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-30

Towing

2-wheel drive models ............6-13

4-wheel drive models ............6-14

Flat towing ..................9-35

Tow truck towing...............6-12

Towing load/specification ..........9-28

Trailer towing .................9-24

Transceiver

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver......2-51

Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13

Driving with manual transmission ......5-17

Travel (See registering your vehicle in

another country) .................9-10

Trip computer ...................2-5

Trip odometer ...................2-4

Truck - camper loading .............9-23

Turn signal switch ................2-30

Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-36

Vanity mirror ...................3-13

Variable voltage control system.........8-17

Vehicle dimensions and weights .........9-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-32

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-34

Vehicle identification...............9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-10

Vehicle loading information ...........9-13

Vehicle recovery..............6-14, 6-15

Vehicle security system .............2-23

Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-

lizer system), engine start......2-24, 3-2, 5-11

Ventilators .....................4-2

Visors .......................3-12

Voltmeter......................2-8

Warning

4WD warning light..............2-16

Air bag warning light .........1-72, 2-18

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-14

Battery charge warning light ........2-15

Brake warning light .............2-15

Door open warning light...........2-15

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-15

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-30

Low fuel warning light ............2-16

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-16

Low washer fluid warning light .......2-18

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-66

Seat belt warning light............2-18

Vehicle security system ...........2-23

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-71

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders...................2-13

Warning lights ..................2-13

Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-25

Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-9

Wheels and tires.................8-32

Wheel/tire size...................9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle

in another country ................9-10

Window washer fluid ..............8-15

Windows

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-47

Manual windows ...............2-47

Power windows ...............2-45

Rear power windows ............2-47

Rear sliding window .............2-48

10-6

Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-25

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-25

Wiper blades.................8-22

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical

and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

●Engine oil with API Certification Mark

●Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Nissan 2010 Frontier Owners Manual | Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation